Sunteți pe pagina 1din 188

Relion 615 series

Line Differential Protection and Control


RED615
Application Manual

Document ID: 1MRS756498


Issued: 2014-01-24
Revision: K
Product version: 5.0

Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third
party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such
license.

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation

Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/
or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby
requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and
information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure
network. It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network
administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the
necessary measures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application
of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs,
etc.) to protect the product and the network, its system and interface included,
against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion,
leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB is not liable for any such damages
and/or losses.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.

Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC
directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low
voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international
standards of the IEC 60255 series.

Table of contents

Table of contents
Section 1

Introduction.......................................................................5
This manual........................................................................................5
Intended audience..............................................................................5
Product documentation.......................................................................6
Product documentation set............................................................6
Document revision history.............................................................6
Related documentation..................................................................7
Symbols and conventions...................................................................7
Symbols.........................................................................................7
Document conventions..................................................................8
Functions, codes and symbols......................................................8

Section 2

RED615 overview...........................................................13
Overview...........................................................................................13
Product version history................................................................14
PCM600 and IED connectivity package version..........................14
Operation functionality......................................................................15
Optional functions........................................................................15
Physical hardware............................................................................15
Local HMI.........................................................................................17
Display.........................................................................................18
LEDs............................................................................................19
Keypad........................................................................................19
Web HMI...........................................................................................20
Authorization.....................................................................................21
Audit trail......................................................................................22
Communication.................................................................................24
Self-healing Ethernet ring............................................................25
Secure communication................................................................26

Section 3

RED615 standard configurations...................................27


Standard configurations....................................................................27
Addition of control functions for primary devices and the
use of binary inputs and outputs..................................................29
Connection diagrams........................................................................30
Standard configuration A..................................................................34
Applications.................................................................................34
Functions.....................................................................................35
Default I/O connections..........................................................35
Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................37

RED615
Application Manual

Table of contents

Functional diagrams....................................................................38
Functional diagrams for protection ........................................38
Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................42
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.........................43
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................45
Functional diagrams for measurement functions...................47
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs.........................49
Functional diagrams for other timer logics ............................52
Other functions ......................................................................53
Standard configuration B..................................................................53
Applications.................................................................................53
Functions.....................................................................................54
Default I/O connections..........................................................54
Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................56
Functional diagrams....................................................................58
Functional diagrams for protection.........................................58
Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................68
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.........................68
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................71
Functional diagrams for measurement functions...................74
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs.........................75
Functional diagrams for other timer logics.............................78
Other functions ......................................................................79
Standard configuration C..................................................................79
Applications.................................................................................79
Functions.....................................................................................80
Default I/O connections..........................................................80
Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................82
Functional diagrams....................................................................83
Functional diagrams for protection.........................................84
Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................90
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.........................91
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................94
Functional diagrams for measurement functions...................97
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs.........................98
Functional diagrams for other timer logics...........................101
Other functions ....................................................................102
Standard configuration D................................................................102
Applications...............................................................................102
Functions...................................................................................103
Default I/O connections........................................................103
Default disturbance recorder settings...................................105
Functional diagrams..................................................................108
2

RED615
Application Manual

Table of contents

Functional diagrams for protection ......................................108


Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder......................120
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................121
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................124
Functional diagrams for measurement functions ................127
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs.......................129
Functional diagrams for other timer logics...........................132
Other functions ....................................................................133
Standard configuration E................................................................134
Applications...............................................................................134
Functions...................................................................................135
Default I/O connections........................................................135
Default disturbance recorder settings...................................137
Sensor settings..........................................................................139
Functional diagrams..................................................................141
Functional diagrams for protection.......................................142
Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder......................152
Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................153
Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................156
Functional diagrams for measurement functions.................159
Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs ......................161
Other functions ....................................................................164

Section 4

Requirements for measurement transformers..............165


Current transformers......................................................................165
Current transformer requirements for non-directional
overcurrent protection................................................................165
Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit
factor....................................................................................165
Non-directional overcurrent protection.................................166
Example for non-directional overcurrent protection..............167

Section 5

IED physical connections.............................................169


Inputs..............................................................................................169
Energizing inputs.......................................................................169
Phase currents.....................................................................169
Residual current...................................................................169
Phase voltages.....................................................................169
Residual voltage...................................................................170
Sensor inputs.......................................................................170
Auxiliary supply voltage input....................................................170
Binary inputs..............................................................................170
RTD/mA inputs..........................................................................172
Outputs...........................................................................................173

RED615
Application Manual

Table of contents

Outputs for tripping and controlling............................................173


Outputs for signalling.................................................................173
IRF.............................................................................................175
Protection communication options..................................................175

Section 6

Glossary.......................................................................177

RED615
Application Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRS756498 K

Section 1

Introduction

1.1

This manual
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines
sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose
a typical protection function can be used. The manual can also be used when
calculating settings.

1.2

Intended audience
This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for
planning, pre-engineering and engineering.
The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical power
engineering and have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemes
and principles.

RED615
Application Manual

Section 1
Introduction

Installation

Planning &
purchase
Quick start guide
Quick installation guide
Brochure
Product guide
Operation manual
Installation manual
Connection diagram
Engineering manual
Technical manual
Application manual
Communication protocol manual
IEC 61850 Engineering guide
Point list manual

Decommissioning,
deinstallation & disposal

Product documentation set

Maintenance

1.3.1

Operation

Product documentation

Engineering

1.3

Commissioning

1MRS756498 K

c
c

GUID-12DC16B2-2DC1-48DF-8734-0C8B7116124C V1 EN

Figure 1:

The intended use of documents during the product life cycle

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded


from the ABB Website http://www.abb.com/relion.

1.3.2

Document revision history


Document revision/date

Product version

History

A/2008-10-03

1.1

First release

B/2009-07-03

2.0

Content updated to correspond to the


product version

C/2010-06-11

3.0

Content updated to correspond to the


product version

D/2010-06-29

3.0

Terminology updated

E/2010-09-24

3.0

Content updated

F/2012-05-11

4.0

Content updated to correspond to the


product version

Table continues on next page

RED615
Application Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRS756498 K

Document revision/date

Product version

History

G/2013-02-21

4.0 FP1

Content updated to correspond to the


product version

H/2013-12-20

5.0

Content updated to correspond to the


product version

K/2014-01-24

5.0

Content updated

Download the latest documents from the ABB Website


http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

1.3.3

Related documentation
Name of the document

Document ID

Modbus Communication Protocol Manual

1MRS756468

DNP3 Communication Protocol Manual

1MRS756709

IEC 60870-5-103 Communication Protocol Manual

1MRS756710

IEC 61850 Engineering Guide

1MRS756475

Engineering Manual

1MRS757121

Installation Manual

1MRS756375

Operation Manual

1MRS756708

Technical Manual

1MRS756887

1.4

Symbols and conventions

1.4.1

Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard
which could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could


result in personal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related


to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence
of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage
to equipment or property.

RED615
Application Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRS756498 K

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and


conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to
understand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged
equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury
or death. Therefore, comply fully with all warning and caution notices.

1.4.2

Document conventions
A particular convention may not be used in this manual.

1.4.3

Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
To navigate between the options, use
and
.
Menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
Parameter names are shown in italics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.
The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
IED input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier font.
When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE.
This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is "Advanced".

Functions, codes and symbols


Table 1:

Functions included in the IED

Function

IEC 61850

IEC 60617

IEC-ANSI

Protection
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent
protection, low stage
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent
protection, high stage
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent
protection, instantaneous stage

PHLPTOC1

3I> (1)

51P-1 (1)

PHHPTOC1

3I>> (1)

51P-2 (1)

PHHPTOC2

3I>> (2)

51P-2 (2)

PHIPTOC1

3I>>> (1)

50P/51P (1)

Table continues on next page

RED615
Application Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRS756498 K

Function

IEC 61850

IEC 60617

IEC-ANSI

DPHLPDOC1

3I> -> (1)

67-1 (1)

DPHLPDOC2

3I> -> (2)

67-1 (2)

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,


high stage

DPHHPDOC1

3I>> -> (1)

67-2 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, low stage

EFLPTOC1

Io> (1)

51N-1 (1)

EFLPTOC2

Io> (2)

51N-1 (2)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, high


stage

EFHPTOC1

Io>> (1)

51N-2 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection,


instantaneous stage

EFIPTOC1

Io>>> (1)

50N/51N (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage

DEFLPDEF1

Io> -> (1)

67N-1 (1)

DEFLPDEF2

Io> -> (2)

67N-1 (2)

DEFHPDEF1

Io>> -> (1)

67N-2 (1)

EFPADM1

Yo> -> (1)

21YN (1)

EFPADM2

Yo> -> (2)

21YN (2)

EFPADM3

Yo> -> (3)

21YN (3)

WPWDE1

Po> -> (1)

32N (1)

WPWDE2

Po> -> (2)

32N (2)

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection,


low stage

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage


Admittance based earth-fault

Wattmetric based earth-fault

protection1)

protection1)

WPWDE3

Po> -> (3)

32N (3)

Transient / intermittent earth-fault protection

INTRPTEF1

Io> -> IEF (1)

67NIEF (1)

Harmonics based earth-fault protection1)

HAEFPTOC1

Io>HA (1)

51NHA (1)

Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault


protection, using calculated Io

EFHPTOC1

Io>> (1)

51N-2 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection

NSPTOC1

I2> (1)

46 (1)

NSPTOC2

I2> (2)

46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection

PDNSPTOC1

I2/I1> (1)

46PD (1)

Residual overvoltage protection

ROVPTOV1

Uo> (1)

59G (1)

ROVPTOV2

Uo> (2)

59G (2)

ROVPTOV3

Uo> (3)

59G (3)

PHPTUV1

3U< (1)

27 (1)

PHPTUV2

3U< (2)

27 (2)

PHPTUV3

3U< (3)

27 (3)

PHPTOV1

3U> (1)

59 (1)

PHPTOV2

3U> (2)

59 (2)

PHPTOV3

3U> (3)

59 (3)

Positive-sequence undervoltage protection

PSPTUV1

U1< (1)

47U+ (1)

Negative-sequence overvoltage protection

NSPTOV1

U2> (1)

47O- (1)

Frequency protection

FRPFRQ1

f>/f<,df/dt (1)

81 (1)

FRPFRQ2

f>/f<,df/dt (2)

81 (2)

FRPFRQ3

f>/f<,df/dt (3)

81 (3)

FRPFRQ4

f>/f<,df/dt (4)

81 (4)

Three-phase undervoltage protection

Three-phase overvoltage protection

Table continues on next page


RED615
Application Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRS756498 K

Function

IEC 61850

IEC 60617

IEC-ANSI

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders,


cables and distribution transformers

T1PTTR1

3Ith>F (1)

49F (1)

Three-phase thermal overload protection for


power transformers, two time constants

T2PTTR1

3Ith>T (1)

49T (1)

Binary signal transfer

BSTGGIO1

BST (1)

BST (1)

Circuit breaker failure protection

CCBRBRF1

3I>/Io>BF (1)

51BF/51NBF
(1)

Three-phase inrush detector

INRPHAR1

3I2f> (1)

68 (1)

Master trip

TRPPTRC1

Master Trip (1)

94/86 (1)

TRPPTRC2

Master Trip (2)

94/86 (2)

MAPGAPC1

MAP (1)

MAP (1)

MAPGAPC2

MAP (2)

MAP (2)

MAPGAPC3

MAP (3)

MAP (3)

MAPGAPC4

MAP (4)

MAP (4)

MAPGAPC5

MAP (5)

MAP (5)

MAPGAPC6

MAP (6)

MAP (6)

MAPGAPC7

MAP (7)

MAP (7)

MAPGAPC8

MAP (8)

MAP (8)

MAPGAPC9

MAP (9)

MAP (9)

MAPGAPC10

MAP (10)

MAP (10)

MAPGAPC11

MAP (11)

MAP (11)

MAPGAPC12

MAP (12)

MAP (12)

MAPGAPC13

MAP (13)

MAP (13)

MAPGAPC14

MAP (14)

MAP (14)

MAPGAPC15

MAP (15)

MAP (15)

MAPGAPC16

MAP (16)

MAP (16)

MAPGAPC17

MAP (17)

MAP (17)

MAPGAPC18

MAP (18)

MAP (18)

Fault locator

SCEFRFLO1

FLOC (1)

21FL (1)

Line differential protection with in zone power


transformer

LNPLDF1

3Id/I> (1)

87L (1)

High impedance fault detection

PHIZ1

HIF (1)

HIZ (1)

Current total demand distortion

CMHAI1

PQM3I (1)

PQM3I (1)

Voltage total harmonic distortion

VMHAI1

PQM3U (1)

PQM3V (1)

Voltage variation

PHQVVR1

PQMU (1)

PQMV (1)

CBXCBR1

I <-> O CB (1)

I <-> O CB (1)

DCXSWI1

I <-> O DCC
(1)

I <-> O DCC (1)

DCXSWI2

I <-> O DCC
(2)

I <-> O DCC (2)

Multi-purpose protection2)

Power quality

Control
Circuit-breaker control
Disconnector control

Table continues on next page


10

RED615
Application Manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRS756498 K

Function

IEC 61850

IEC 60617

IEC-ANSI

Earthing switch control

ESXSWI1

I <-> O ESC (1)

I <-> O ESC (1)

Disconnector position indication

DCSXSWI1

I <-> O DC (1)

I <-> O DC (1)

DCSXSWI2

I <-> O DC (2)

I <-> O DC (2)

DCSXSWI3

I <-> O DC (3)

I <-> O DC (3)

ESSXSWI1

I <-> O ES (1)

I <-> O ES (1)

ESSXSWI2

I <-> O ES (2)

I <-> O ES (2)

DARREC1

O -> I (1)

79 (1)

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring

SSCBR1

CBCM (1)

CBCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision

TCSSCBR1

TCS (1)

TCM (1)

TCSSCBR2

TCS (2)

TCM (2)

Current circuit supervision

CCRDIF1

MCS 3I (1)

MCS 3I (1)

Fuse failure supervision

SEQRFUF1

FUSEF (1)

60 (1)

Protection communication supervision

PCSRTPC1

PCS (1)

PCS (1)

Runtime counter for machines and devices

MDSOPT1

OPTS (1)

OPTM (1)

Disturbance recorder

RDRE1

DR (1)

DFR (1)

Load profile record

LDPMSTA1

LOADPROF
(1)

LOADPROF
(1)

Three-phase current measurement

CMMXU1

3I (1)

3I (1)

Sequence current measurement

CSMSQI1

I1, I2, I0 (1)

I1, I2, I0 (1)

Residual current measurement

RESCMMXU1

Io (1)

In (1)

Three-phase voltage measurement

VMMXU1

3U (1)

3V (1)

Residual voltage measurement

RESVMMXU1

Uo (1)

Vn (1)

Sequence voltage measurement

VSMSQI1

U1, U2, U0 (1)

V1, V2, V0 (1)

Three-phase power and energy measurement

PEMMXU1

P, E (1)

P, E (1)

RTD/mA measurement

XRGGIO130

X130 (RTD) (1)

X130 (RTD) (1)

Frequency measurement

FMMXU1

f (1)

f (1)

Earthing switch indication

Auto-reclosing
Condition monitoring

Measurement

1) One of the following can be ordered as an option: Admittance based E/F, Wattmetric based E/F or
Harmonics based E/F. The option is an addition to the existing E/F of the original configuration. The
optional E/F has also a predefined configuration in the IED. The optional E/F can be set on or off.
2) For example, used for RTD/mA based protection or analog GOOSE

RED615
Application Manual

11

12

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

Section 2

RED615 overview

2.1

Overview
RED615 is a phase-segregated two-end line differential protection and control IED
(intelligent electronic device) designed for utility and industrial power systems,
including radial, looped and meshed distribution networks with or without
distributed power generation. RED615 is also designed for the protection of line
differential applications having a transformer within the protection zone. The
RED615s communicate between substations over a fibre-optic link or a galvanic
pilot wire connection. RED615 is a member of ABBs Relion product family and
part of its 615 protection and control product series. The 615 series IEDs are
characterized by their compactness and withdrawable-unit design. Re-engineered
from the ground up, the 615 series has been guided by the IEC 61850 standard for
communication and interoperability of substation automation equipment.
The IED provides unit type main protection for overhead lines and cable feeders in
distribution networks. The IED also features current-based protection functions for
remote back-up for down-stream protection IEDs and local back-up for the line
differential main protection. Further, standard configurations B and C also include
earth-fault protection. Standard configuration D includes directional overcurrent
and voltage based protection functions.
The IED is adapted for the protection of overhead line and cable feeders in isolated
neutral, resistance earthed, compensated (impedance earthed) and solidly earthed
networks. Once the IED has been given the application-specific settings, it can
directly be put into service.
The 615 series IEDs support a range of communication protocols including IEC
61850 with GOOSE messaging, IEC 61850-9-2 LE (except in RED615), IEC
60870-5-103, Modbus and DNP3. Profibus DPV1 communication protocol is
supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.

RED615
Application Manual

13

Section 2
RED615 overview
2.1.1

1MRS756498 K

Product version history


Product version

2.1.2

Product released

2.0

Support for DNP3 serial or TCP/IP


Support for IEC 60870-5-103
New standard configurations B and C
Disturbance recorder upload via WHMI

3.0

Additions to configuration B
Application configurability support
Analog GOOSE support
Large display with single line diagram
Enhanced mechanical design
Increased maximum amount of events and fault records
Admittance-based earth-fault protection
Residual overvoltage protection
Low voltage power supply option
Pilot wire modem support

4.0

Additions/changes for configurations A-C


Dual fibre optic Ethernet communication option (COM0032)
Generic control point (SPCGGIO) function blocks
Additional logic blocks
Button object for SLD
Controllable disconnector and earth switch objects for SLD
Wattmetric based E/F
Harmonics based E/F
Increased maximum amount of events and fault records

4.0 FP1

Parallel use of IEC 61850 and DNP3 protocols


Parallel use of IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 protocols
Two selectable indication colors for LEDs (red or green)
Online binary signal monitoring with PCM600

5.0

New configurations D and E


New layout in Application Configuration tool for all configurations
In-zone transformer application support
Fault locator
Load profile recorder
Optional RTD/mA inputs
Profibus adapter support
Support for multiple SLD pages
Import/export of settings via WHMI
Setting usability improvements
HMI event filtering tool

PCM600 and IED connectivity package version

Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 Ver.2.6 or later


RED615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.0 or later

14

Product history

1.1

Parameter Setting
Signal Monitoring
Event Viewer
Disturbance Handling
Application Configuration
RED615
Application Manual

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

Signal Matrix
Graphical Display Editor
Communication Management
IED User Management
IED Compare
Firmware Update
Fault Record tool
Load Record Profile
Lifecycle Traceability
Configuration Wizard
AR Sequence Visualizer
Label Printing
IEC 61850 Configuration
Differential Characteristics Tool

Download connectivity packages from the ABB Website


http://www.abb.com/substationautomation or directly with the
Update Manager in PCM600.

2.2

Operation functionality

2.2.1

Optional functions

2.3

Autoreclosing (configurations B, C, D and E only)


Modbus TCP/IP or RTU/ASCII
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3 TCP/IP or serial
Admittance based earth-fault (configurations B, D and E only)
Watt-metric based earth-fault (configurations B, D and E only)
Harmonics based earth-fault (configurations B, C, D and E only)
Power quality functions (configurations D and E only)
Fault locator (configurations D and E only)
RTD/mA measurement (configuration D only)

Physical hardware
The IED consists of two main parts: plug-in unit and case. The content depends on
the ordered functionality.

RED615
Application Manual

15

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

Table 2:
Main
Plug-in
unit

Plug-in unit and case


Slot ID

Content options

HMI

Small (5 lines, 20 characters)


Large (10 lines, 20 characters)

X100

Auxiliary power/BO
module

48-250 V DC/100-240 V AC; or 24-60 V DC


2 normally-open PO contacts
1 change-over SO contacts
1 normally open SO contact
2 double-pole PO contacts with TCS
1 dedicated internal fault output contact

X110

BIO module

8 binary inputs
4 SO contacts

X120

AI/BI module

Only with configuration B:


3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)
1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)
1 residual voltage input (60-210 V)
3 binary inputs
Only with configurations A, C and D:
3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)
1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)
4 binary inputs

Case

X130

X000

AI/BI module

Only with configuration D:


3 phase voltage inputs (60-120 V)
1 residual voltage input (60-120 V)
4 binary inputs

AI/RTD/mA module

Only with configuration D:


3 phase voltage inputs (60-210 V)
1 residual voltage input (60-210 V)
1 generic mA input
2 RTD sensor inputs

Sensor input module

Only with configuration E:


3 combi sensor inputs (three-phase current and
voltage)
1 residual current input (0.2/1 A)1)

Optional BIO module

Optional for configurations A, B and C:


6 binary inputs
3 SO contacts

Communication module

See the technical manual for details about different


types of communication modules.

1) The 0.2/1 A input is normally used in applications requiring sensitive earth-fault protection and
featuring core-balance current transformers.

Rated values of the current and voltage inputs are basic setting parameters of the
IED. The binary input thresholds are selectable within the range 16176 V DC by
adjusting the binary input setting parameters.
See the installation manual for more information about the case and
the plug-in unit.
The connection diagrams of different hardware modules are presented in this manual.

16

RED615
Application Manual

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

Table 3:
Std.
conf.

Input/output overview
Order code digit
5-6
7-8
AD

AC
AF
AC

AA / AB
AE
AD

AC
AF
FE / FF

AD

AE / AF

AG

DA

AH

2.4

Analog channels
CT
VT

Combi
sensor

Binary channels
BI
BO

RTD

mA

12

4 PO +
6 SO

18

4 PO +
9 SO

11

4 PO +
6 SO

17

4 PO +
9 SO

12

4 PO +
6 SO

18

4 PO +
9 SO

12

4 PO +
6 SO

16

4 PO +
6 SO

4 PO +
6 SO

Local HMI
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the IED. The LHMI
comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.

RED615
Application Manual

17

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

REF615
Overcurrent
Dir. earth-fault
Voltage protection
Phase unbalance
Thermal overload
Breaker failure
Disturb. rec. Triggered
CB condition monitoring
Supervision
Arc detected
Autoreclose shot in progr.

A070704 V4 EN

Figure 2:

2.4.1

Example of the LHMI

Display
The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports two character sizes. The
character size depends on the selected language. The amount of characters and
rows fitting the view depends on the character size.
Table 4:

Small display
Rows in the view

Character size1)

Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6x12 pixels)

20

Large, variable width (13x14 pixels)

8 or more

1) Depending on the selected language

Table 5:

Large display

Character size1)

Rows in the view

Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6x12 pixels)

10

20

Large, variable width (13x14 pixels)

8 or more

1) Depending on the selected language


18

RED615
Application Manual

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

The display view is divided into four basic areas.


1

A070705 V3 EN

Figure 3:

Display layout

1 Header
2 Icon
3 Content
4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)

2.4.2

LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.
There are 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDs can be
configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI,
WHMI or PCM600.

2.4.3

Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. With the push-buttons you can give open or close commands to
objects in the primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a
disconnector. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

RED615
Application Manual

19

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

A071176 V1 EN

Figure 4:

2.5

LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command pushbuttons and RJ-45 communication port

Web HMI
The WHMI allows secure access to the IED via a Web browser. The supported
Web browser versions are Internet Explorer 8.0, 9.0 and 10.0. When the Secure
Communication parameter in the IED is activated, the Web server is forced to take
a secured (HTTPS) connection to WHMI using TLS encryption.
WHMI is disabled by default.

WHMI offers several functions.

Programmable LEDs and event lists


System supervision
Parameter settings
Measurement display
Disturbance records
Phasor diagram
Single-line diagram
Importing/Exporting parameters

The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.

20

RED615
Application Manual

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

A070754 V5 EN

Figure 5:

Example view of the WHMI

The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.

2.6

Locally by connecting the laptop to the IED via the front communication port.
Remotely over LAN/WAN.

Authorization
The user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each with
different rights and default passwords.
The default passwords can be changed with Administrator user rights.
User authorization is disabled by default for LHMI but WHMI
always uses authorization.

RED615
Application Manual

21

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

Table 6:

Predefined user categories

Username

User rights

VIEWER

Read only access

OPERATOR

ENGINEER

ADMINISTRATOR

Selecting remote or local state with


Changing setting groups
Controlling
Clearing indications

(only locally)

Changing settings
Clearing event list
Clearing disturbance records
Changing system settings such as IP address, serial baud rate
or disturbance recorder settings
Setting the IED to test mode
Selecting language

All listed above


Changing password
Factory default activation

For user authorization for PCM600, see PCM600 documentation.

2.6.1

Audit trail
The IED offers a large set of event-logging functions. Normal process-related
events can be viewed by the normal user with Event Viewer in PCM600. Critical
system and IED security-related events are logged to a separate nonvolatile audit
trail for the administrator.
Audit trail is a chronological record of system activities that allows the
reconstruction and examination of the sequence of events and changes in an event.
Past user and process events can be examined and analyzed in a consistent method
with the help of Event List and Event Viewer in PCM600. The IED stores 2048
system events to the nonvolatile audit trail. Additionally, 1024 process events are
stored in a nonvolatile event list. Both the audit trail and event list work according
to the FIFO principle.
User audit trail is defined according to the selected set of requirements from IEEE
1686. The logging is based on predefined usernames or user categories. The user
audit trail events are accessible with IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI.
Table 7:

Audit trail events

Audit trail event


Configuration change

Description
Configuration files changed

Firmware change
Setting group remote

User changed setting group remotely

Table continues on next page


22

RED615
Application Manual

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

Audit trail event

Description

Setting group local

User changed setting group locally

Control remote

DPC object control remote

Control local

DPC object control local

Test on

Test mode on

Test off

Test mode off

Setting commit

Settings have been changed

Time change

Time changed directly by the user. Note that this is not used
when the IED is synchronised properly by the appropriate
protocol (SNTP, IRIG-B, IEEE 1588 v2).

View audit log

Administrator accessed audit trail

Login

Successful login from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI, FTP or


LHMI.

Logout

Successful logout from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI, FTP


or LHMI.

Firmware reset

Reset issued by user or tool

Audit overflow

Too many audit events in the time period

Attached to retrofit test case

Unit has been attached to retrofit case

Removed from retrofit test case

Unit has been removed retrofit case

Reset trips

Reset latched trips (TRPPTRC*)

Violation remote

Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),


WHMI, FTP or LHMI.

Violation local

Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),


WHMI, FTP or LHMI.

PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events together with
normal events. Since only the administrator has the right to read audit trail,
authorization must be properly configured in PCM600. The audit trail cannot be
reset but PCM600 Event Viewer can filter data. Some of the audit trail events are
interesting also as normal process events.
To expose the audit trail events also as normal process events,
define the level parameter via Configuration/Authorization/
Authority logging.
Table 8:

Comparison of authority logging levels

Audit trail event

Authority logging level


None

Configurati
on change

Setting
group

Setting
group,
control

Settings
edit

All

Configuration change

Firmware change

Firmware change fail

Table continues on next page

RED615
Application Manual

23

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

Audit trail event

Authority logging level

Attached to retrofit test


case

Removed from retrofit


test case

Reset trips
Setting group remote

Setting group local

Control remote

Control local

Test on

Test off

Setting commit

2.7

Time change

View audit log

Login

Logout

Firmware reset

Audit overflow

Communication
The IED supports a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850, IEC
60870-5-103, Modbus and DNP3. Profibus DPV1 communication protocol is
supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302. Operational information
and controls are available through these protocols. However, some communication
functionality, for example, horizontal communication between the IEDs, is only
enabled by the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
The IEC 61850 communication implementation supports all monitoring and
control functions. Additionally, parameter settings, disturbance recordings and
fault records can be accessed using the IEC 61850 protocol. Disturbance recordings
are available to any Ethernet-based application in the standard COMTRADE file
format. The IED can send and receive binary signals from other IEDs (so-called
horizontal communication) using the IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE profile, where the
highest performance class with a total transmission time of 3 ms is supported.
Furthermore, the IED supports sending and receiving of analog values using
GOOSE messaging. The IED meets the GOOSE performance requirements for
tripping applications in distribution substations, as defined by the IEC 61850
standard.
The IED can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves one client
connection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850 and
Modbus.

24

RED615
Application Manual

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated optional communication modules. The IED can be connected to Ethernetbased communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-TX). If
connection to a RS-485 network is required, a 9-pin screw-terminal connector, an
optional 9-pin D-sub connector or an optional ST-type glass-fibre connector can be
used.

2.7.1

Self-healing Ethernet ring


For the correct operation of self-healing loop topology, it is essential that the
external switches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in
the switches. Otherwise, connecting the loop topology can cause problems to the
network. The IED itself does not support link-down detection or RSTP. The ring
recovery process is based on the aging of the MAC addresses, and the link-up/linkdown events can cause temporary breaks in communication. For a better
performance of the self-healing loop, it is recommended that the external switch
furthest from the IED loop is assigned as the root switch (bridge priority = 0) and
the bridge priority increases towards the IED loop. The end links of the IED loop
can be attached to the same external switch or to two adjacent external switches. A
self-healing Ethernet ring requires a communication module with at least two
Ethernet interfaces for all IEDs.
Client A

Client B

Network A
Network B

Managed Ethernet switch


with RSTP support

Managed Ethernet switch


with RSTP support

GUID-283597AF-9F38-4FC7-B87A-73BFDA272D0F V3 EN

Figure 6:

Self-healing Ethernet ring solution

The Ethernet ring solution supports the connection of up to 30


IEDs. If more than 30 IEDs are to be connected, it is recommended
that the network is split into several rings with no more than 30
IEDs per ring. Each IED has a 50-s store-and-forward delay, and

RED615
Application Manual

25

Section 2
RED615 overview

1MRS756498 K

to fullfill the performance requirements for fast horizontal


communication, the ring size is limited to 30 IEDs.

2.7.2

Secure communication
The IED supports secure communication for WHMI and file transfer protocol. If
the Secure Communication parameter is activated, protocols require TLS based
encryption method from the client. In this case WHMI must be connected from a
Web browser using the HTTPS protocol and in case of file transfer the client must
use FTPS.

26

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Section 3

RED615 standard configurations

3.1

Standard configurations
RED615 is available in five alternative standard configurations. The standard
signal configuration can be altered by means of the signal matrix or the graphical
application functionality of the Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600.
Further, the application configuration functionality of PCM600 supports the
creation of multi-layer logic functions utilizing various logical elements including
timers and flip-flops. By combining protection functions with logic function blocks
the IED configuration can be adapted to user specific application requirements.
The IED is delivered from the factory with default connections described in the
functional diagrams for binary inputs, binary outputs, function-to-function
connections and alarm LEDs. The positive measuring direction of directional
protection functions is towards the outgoing feeder.
Table 9:

Standard configurations

Description

Table 10:

Std. conf.

Line differential protection and CB control

Line differential protection with directional earth-fault protection, CB condition


monitoring and CB control

Line differential protection with non-directional earth-fault protection, CB condition


monitoring and CB control

Line differential protection, directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault


protection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection and measurement
functions, CB condition monitoring, CB control and fault locator (optional)

Line differential protection with directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault


protection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection and measurement
functions, CB condition monitoring, CB control, sensor inputs for phase currents and
phase voltages and fault locator (optional)

Supported functions
IEC 61850

Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, low stage

PHLPTOC

Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, high stage

PHHPTOC

Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,


instantaneous stage

PHIPTOC

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, low stage


Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, high stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection, low stage

EFLPTOC

2 2)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, high stage

EFHPTOC

1 2)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, instantaneous stage

EFIPTOC

1 2)

Function

DPHLPDOC

DPHHPDOC

Protection1)

Table continues on next page


RED615
Application Manual

27

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Function

IEC 61850

Directional earth-fault protection, low stage

DEFLPDEF

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage

DEFHPDEF

1 2)3)

1 2)3)

1 4)5)

Admittance-based earth-fault protection 6)

EFPADM

(3) 2)3)6)

(3) 2)3)6)

(3) 2)5)6)

Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection 6)

WPWDE

(3) 2)3)6)

(3) 2)3)6)

(3) 2)5)6)

Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection


Harmonics-based earth-fault protection

6)

INTRPTEF

HAEFPTOC

Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using


calculated Io

EFHPTOC

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection

NSPTOC

Phase discontinuity protection

PDNSPTOC

Residual overvoltage protection

ROVPTOV

Three-phase undervoltage protection


Three-phase overvoltage protection

2 2)3)

7)8)

(1)

6)8)

E
2 4)5)

1
(1)

6)8)

1 4)
2

D
2 2)3)

7)8)

(1)

6)8)

1 5)8)
(1) 6)8)

1 4)

1 4)
2

3 7)

3 5)

PHPTUV

PHPTOV

Positive-sequence undervoltage protection

PSPTUV

Negative-sequence overvoltage protection

NSPTOV

Frequency protection

FRPFRQ

Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and


distribution transformers

T1PTTR

Three-phase thermal overload protection for power


transformers, two time constants

T2PTTR

Binary signal transfer

BSTGGIO

3 3)

1
9)

Circuit breaker failure protection

CCBRBRF

Three-phase inrush detector

INRPHAR

Master trip

TRPPTRC

MAPGAPC

18

18

18

Multi-purpose protection

10)

Fault locator

SCEFRFLO

Line differential protection with in zone power transformer

LNPLDF

High impedance fault detection

PHIZ

18

18

(1)

(1)

Power quality
Current total demand distortion

CMHAI

(1) 11)

(1) 11)

Voltage total harmonic distortion

VMHAI

(1)

11)

(1) 11)

(1)

11)

(1) 11)

Voltage variation

PHQVVR

Control
Circuit-breaker control

CBXCBR

Disconnector control

DCXSWI

Earthing switch control

ESXSWI

Disconnector position indication

DCSXSWI

Earthing switch indication

ESSXSWI

Autoreclosing

DARREC

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

Condition monitoring
Circuit-breaker condition monitoring

SSCBR

Trip circuit supervision

TCSSCBR

Current circuit supervision

CCRDIF

Fuse failure supervision

SEQRFUF

Protection communication supervision

PCSRTPC

Runtime counter for machines and devices

MDSOPT

Disturbance recorder

RDRE

Load profile record

LDPMSTA

Three-phase current measurement

CMMXU

Sequence current measurement

CSMSQI

Residual current measurement

RESCMMXU

Three-phase voltage measurement

VMMXU

Measurement

Table continues on next page


28

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Function

IEC 61850

Residual voltage measurement

RESVMMXU

Sequence voltage measurement

VSMSQI

Three-phase power and energy measurement

PEMMXU

RTD/mA measurement

XRGGIO130

Frequency measurement

FMMXU

(1)
1

1, 2, ... = number of included instances


() = optional

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)

The instances of a protection function represent the number of identical protection function blocks available in the standard configuration.
Io selectable by parameter, Io measured as default
"Uo measured" is always used.
Io selectable by parameter, "Io calculated" as default
"Uo calculated" is always used.
One of the following can be ordered as an option: admittance-based E/F, wattmetric-based E/F or harmonics-based E/F. The option is
an addition to the existing E/F of the original configuration. The optional E/F has also a predefined configuration in the IED. The optional
E/F can be set on or off.
Uo selectable by parameter, Uo measured as default
"Io measured" is always used.
"Io calculated" is always used.
Multi-purpose protection is used, for example, for RTD/mA-based protection or analog GOOSE.
Power quality option includes current total demand distortion, voltage total harmonic distortion and voltage variation.

3.1.1

Addition of control functions for primary devices and the


use of binary inputs and outputs
If extra control functions intended for controllable primary devices are added to the
configuration, additional binary inputs and/or outputs are needed to complement
the standard configuration.
If the number of inputs and/or outputs in a standard configuration is not sufficient,
it is possible either to modify the chosen IED standard configuration in order to
release some binary inputs or binary outputs which have originally been configured
for other purposes, or to integrate an external input/output module, for example
RIO600, to the IED.
The external I/O modules binary inputs and outputs can be used for the less timecritical binary signals of the application. The integration enables releasing some
initially reserved binary inputs and outputs of the IEDs standard configuration.
The suitability of the IEDs binary outputs which have been selected for primary
device control should be carefully verified, for example make and carry and
breaking capacity. If the requirements for the primary device control circuit are not
met, using external auxiliary relays should be considered.

RED615
Application Manual

29

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.2

1MRS756498 K

Connection diagrams

GUID-7A5D7398-4E4E-4B45-A561-01E3AF4C1640 V1 EN

Figure 7:
30

Connection diagram for the A and C configurations


RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

GUID-9A18BC7A-D172-4FD4-9C25-BF39C5879E5D V1 EN

Figure 8:

RED615
Application Manual

Connection diagram for the B configuration

31

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

L1
L2
L3
A

a
da

RED615

dn

X100

X120
1
2

Positive
Current
Direction

BI 1

U aux
-

BI 2

S1
S2

P2

P1

S1

4
5

BI 3
PO1

BI 4

6
7

1/5A

8
9

N
1/5A

10
11

N
1/5A

12

N
1/5A

14

2
3

IRF

P1

6
7

2)
IL1

PO2
8
9
10

IL2
IL3

SO1
11
12
13

Io

SO2

S2
P2

X130
1

BI 1

2
3
5

PO4

12
13
14
15
16

21
23

BI 4

11

17
15
19
18
20
22

TCS1

BI 3

14
16

PO3

BI 2

10

6)

TCS2

60 210V

U1

N
60 210V

U2

N
60 210V

17

N
60 210V

18

24

not in use

N
60 210V

U3
Uo

X110

X110
1
2
3

BI 3

19
18
20

BI 4

7
8

SO3
22
21
23

BI 5

SO4
24

BI 6

10
11

BI 7

12

BI 8

13

X1
LAN
X2
LAN

RX
TX

16
15
17
SO2

X12

SO1

BI 2

X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

14

BI 1

1) 3)
1) 3)
1) 4)

GND
GNDC
IRIG-B IRIG-B +
AGND
B/- / TX
A/+
B/A/+ / RX
1) 5)

1) Optional
2) The IED features an automatic short-circuit
mechanism in the CT connector when plug-in
unit is detached
3) 100BaseFx / LC or 100BaseTx / RJ-45
4) RS-485 serial bus
5) Fibre Optic (ST) Serial Bus
6) AIM0006 (5U+4BI)
Alternative Module AIM0003 (5U+2RTD+1mA)

X16
Line Differential Protection Communication

GUID-28FB3DA2-5BA8-4041-B17D-80C5B5F17D4D V1 EN

Figure 9:

32

Connection diagram for the D configuration

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

L1
L2
L3

RED615
X130

Positive
Current
Direction

X100

0,2/1A

U aux

Io

IRF

X131
4

IL1

5
7

8
9
10

U2

SO1

X133
4

11
12
13

IL3

5
7

SO2

U3

PO3
P1

4
5

PO2

IL2

6
7

X132
4

PO1

U1

S1

TCS1

S2
P2

X110

PO4

BI 1

TCS2

14
16
17
15
19
18
20
22
21
23
24

BI 2

4
5

X110

BI 3

14
SO1

BI 4

7
8

BI 5

22
21
23

BI 7

12

SO4

BI 8

13

X1
LAN
X2
LAN

RX
TX

19
18
20
SO3

11

X12

SO2

BI 6

10

X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

16
15
17

24

1) 3)
1) 3)
1) 4)

GND
GNDC
IRIG-B IRIG-B +
AGND
B/- / TX
A/+
B/A/+ / RX
1) 5)

1)
3)
4)
5)

Optional
100BaseFx / LC or 100BaseTx / RJ-45
RS-485 serial bus
Fibre Optic (ST) Serial Bus

X16
Line Differential Protection Communication

GUID-D6DCAA04-E7EA-4926-BEED-D7BD476C9142 V1 EN

Figure 10:

RED615
Application Manual

Connection diagram for the E configuration

33

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.3

Standard configuration A

3.3.1

Applications

1MRS756498 K

The standard configuration for line current differential protection is intended for
cable feeder applications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration
for line current differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

34

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

3.3.2

Functions

RED615

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL IED


With in-zone power transformer support
LOCAL HMI

PROTECTION

ALSO AVAILABLE
Conguration
System
HMI
Time
Authorization

Master Trip
Lockout relay
94/86

ESC

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)


- Disturbance and fault recorder
- Event log and recorded data
- IED self-supervision
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
- Web HMI
AND
OR

Clear

R
L

U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A

3I

I2>
46

3I>
51P-1

I
PHIZ
HIZ

3I>>>
50P/51P
2

3I>>
51P-2

3I>/Io>BF
51BF/51NBF

3I2f>
68

3dI>L
87L

Clear

R
L

CONDITION MONITORING
AND SUPERVISION

Io

PCS
PCS

COMMUNICATION
Protocols:
IEC 61850-8-1
Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3

OPTS
OPTM

MCS 3I
MCS 3I

BST
BST

18
MAP
MAP

ESC

TCS
TCM

Object

Ctrl

2)

1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

MEASUREMENT
Ind

DC

ES

3)

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

- I, Io
- Limit value supervision
- Load prole record
- Symmetrical components

3)

CB

2)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Interfaces:
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial:
Serial glass ber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232/485
D-sub 9, IRIG-B

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1)

1)

STANDARD
CONFIGURATION

Check availability of binary inputs/outputs


from technical documentation
Control and indication function for
primary object
Status indication function for
primary object

Analog interface types

1)

Current transformer

Voltage transformer

1)

Conventional transformer inputs

REMARKS
Optional
function

Calculated
value

3 No. of
instances
Io/Uo

3I

OR Alternative
function to be
dened when
Sum of phase
ordering
currents

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-78F52211-9D37-4A2F-9527-CD61BDEA68A2 V1 EN

Figure 11:

3.3.2.1

Functionality overview for standard configuration A

Default I/O connections


Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.

RED615
Application Manual

35

1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1 0
0
0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0
0

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Table 11:
Binary input

Default connections for binary inputs


Description

X110-BI2

External start of breaker failure protection

X110-BI3

Setting group change

X110-BI4

Binary signal transfer input

X110-BI5

Disconnector open/truck in

X110-BI6

Disconnector open/truck out

X110-BI7

Earth-switch close

X110-BI8

Earth-switch open

X120-BI1

Blocking input for general use

X120-BI2

Circuit breaker close

X120-BI3

Circuit breaker open

X120-BI4

Lockout reset

Table 12:
Binary input

Default connections for binary outputs


Description

X100-PO1

Close circuit breaker

X100-PO2

Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker

X100-SO1

Line differential protection trip alarm

X100-SO2

Protection communication failure or differential protection not available

X100-PO3

Open circuit breaker/trip 1

X100-PO4

Open circuit breaker/trip 2

X110- SO1

Upstream overcurrent blocking

X110- SO2

Backup protection operated

X110- SO3

Binary transfer signal

Table 13:
LED

36

1MRS756498 K

Default connections for LEDs


Description

Line differential protection biased stage operate

Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate

Line differential protection is not available

Protection communication failure

Current transformer failure detected

Phase or negative sequence component over current

Breaker failure operate

Disturbance recorder triggered

Trip circuit supervision alarm

10

Binary signal transfer receive

11

Binary signal transfer send

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

3.3.2.2

Default disturbance recorder settings


Table 14:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder analog channels


Description

IL1

IL2

IL3

Io

10

11

12

Table 15:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder binary channels


ID text

Level trigger mode

LNPLDF1 - start

Positive or Rising

LNPLDF1 - operate

Positive or Rising

PHIPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

PHHPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

PHHPTOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

PHLPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

NSPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

NSPTOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

CCBRBRF1 - trret

Level trigger off

10

CCBRBRF1 - trbu

Level trigger off

11

PHIPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
12

NSPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate
13

INRPHAR1 - blk2h

Level trigger off

14

PCSRTPC1 - alarm

Level trigger off

15

LNPLDF1 - rstd2h

Level trigger off

16

LNPLDF1 - prot not active

Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

RED615
Application Manual

37

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
Channel

3.3.3

1MRS756498 K

ID text

Level trigger mode

28

X110BI4 - binary transfer

Level trigger off

29

X110BI2 - ext ccbrbrf start

Level trigger off

30

X120BI3 - CB opened

Level trigger off

31

X120BI2 - CB closed

Level trigger off

32

X120BI1 - ext OC blocking

Level trigger off

Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and functionto-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The IED offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED or via binary input.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be
initiated in the configuration. The Application Configuration tool also includes
fixed Boolean signals TRUE and FALSE which can be used as per the application
need.

3.3.3.1

Functional diagrams for protection


The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
The line current differential function LNPLDF1 is intended to be the main
protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution lines or
cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer failure is
detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied by
predefined settings, if ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration, it is
activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and earthswitch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate position. The intention of
this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by
multiplying with the setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

38

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to a
failure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and shortcircuit protection. The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be
blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1. The instantaneous and first high
stage are blocked by activation of line differential protection.
LNPLDF1

OR
CCRDIF1_FAIL
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL

B1
B2

BLOCK
BLOCK_LS
ENA_MULT_HS

OPERATE
START
STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC
OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC
BLKD2H_REM
PRO_ACTIVE

OR
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

IN

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

NOT
OUT

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
O

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_RSTD2H

OR

GUID-214BD8DC-0A09-4BD2-BF07-0AD63322734C V1 EN

Figure 12:

RED615
Application Manual

Line differential protection functions

39

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

PHIPTOC1

B1
B2

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_START

OPERATE
START

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_START

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

PHHPTOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

PHHPTOC2
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

PHLPTOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHxPTOC_OPERATE

GUID-1EC75CEC-F8EC-4181-9EA6-B077515E9347 V1 EN

Figure 13:

Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking both from the start of the instantaneous and the high stage
overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This
output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection
stage of the IED at the upstream bay.
OR6
PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

GUID-53A4ACB1-873E-4AA6-A478-536C7BA0E03F V1 EN

Figure 14:

Upstream blocking logic

The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H offers the possibility to
either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the available
overcurrent function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK

BLK2H

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-76C18EB4-E3EC-427D-B47A-9E1BFD2DBA5E V1 EN

Figure 15:

Inrush detector function

Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance. Both the negative sequence overcurrent protections are
blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.

40

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

NSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_START

NSPTOC2

OR
B1
B2

NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC_OPERATE

GUID-80E6D94D-4D46-4B79-8383-3C6C3577E763 V1 EN

Figure 16:

Negative sequence overcurrent protection function

The overcurrent protection and negative sequence overcurrent


protection are used as backup protection against line differential
protection.
The backup protection operated information is available at binary output
X110:SO2 which can be used for external alarm purpose.
The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CCBRBRF1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
START
POSCLOSE
CB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_AL
TRBU
TRRET

CCBRBRF1_TRBU
CCBRBRF1_TRRET

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-ED51D248-8DD6-45C2-8B99-8A4885023125 V1 EN

Figure 17:

Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics: TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary outputs X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are

RED615
Application Manual

41

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4
can be assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset
with a push button.
OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

TRPPTRC1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-8768D080-5A99-4E2D-8E01-FDD152866526 V1 EN

Figure 18:

Trip logic TRPPTRC1


OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

TRPPTRC2

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-8EC8BF92-8C1B-4315-A462-6A661E013089 V1 EN

Figure 19:

3.3.3.2

Trip logic TRPPTRC2

Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder


The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.

42

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

RDRE
RDRE1

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2_START
PHLPTOC1_START
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
PCSRTPC1_ALARM
LNPLDF_RSTD2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2

X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

TRIGGERED

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

GUID-7A54A97D-ED30-4EF9-A3CF-F0F21EA72AAB V1 EN

Figure 20:

3.3.3.3

Disturbance recorder

Functional diagrams for condition monitoring


CCRDIF1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is
detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measure the
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.
CCRDIF1
BLOCK

FAIL
ALARM

CCRDIF1_FAIL
CCRDIF1_ALARM

GUID-3C8B9191-F624-40FF-BE4E-54B68FC6760F V1 EN

Figure 21:

Current circuit supervision function

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
RED615
Application Manual

43

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breaker


tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM

B1
B2

TCSSCBR_ALARM

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-35D08B4E-51FC-4118-AD4C-0C046AA23550 V1 EN

Figure 22:

Trip circuit supervision function


OR6

TRPPTRC1_TRIP
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-5EF1437A-0FC1-43BD-8BCA-4525748A3F10 V1 EN

Figure 23:

Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

The protection communication supervision function PCSRTPC1 is used in the


configuration to block the operation of the line differential function. This way, the
malfunction of the line differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal
transfer outputs during protection communication failure also blocked. These are
done internally without connections in the configurations. The protection
communication supervision alarm is connected to alarm LED 4, disturbance
recorder and binary output X100:SO2.
PCSRTPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM
COMM

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

GUID-1C5B59EA-A7A6-4ED4-AA51-392008C46EBA V1 EN

Figure 24:

44

Protection communication supervision function

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binary
information which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking
and alarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI4 is connected to the binary signal
transfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information
are connected to the BSTGGIO input 6 and 7. These are interlocking information
from control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is
connected to input 8.
As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving
of same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote
circuit breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the
binary signal transfer function outputs. Also the remote binary transfer output
signal is connected to the binary output X110:SO3.
BSTGGIO1
X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CCRDIF1_FAIL

SEND_SIG_1
SEND_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5
SEND_SIG_6
SEND_SIG_7
SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1
RECV_SIG_2
RECV_SIG_3
RECV_SIG_4
RECV_SIG_5
RECV_SIG_6
RECV_SIG_7
RECV_SIG_8
SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-6E428F3A-5652-4573-BFEC-71E5893CE434 V1 EN

Figure 25:

3.3.3.4

Binary signal transfer function

Functional diagrams for control and interlocking


Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
the standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing
switch status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

GUID-42D1B156-F8DC-47AE-8B49-689E1A4F9930 V1 EN

Figure 26:

Disconnector 1 control logic


ESSXSWI1

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

GUID-1FCBEC78-041D-49E7-8440-F24B71B0979E V1 EN

Figure 27:

RED615
Application Manual

Earth-switch 1 control logic

45

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of
the trip logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector
and earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the
remote end.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,
together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the closeenable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for
the circuit breaker is always enabled.
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for
example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.

CBXCBR1
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
ENA_OPEN
ENA_CLOSE
BLK_OPEN
BLK_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
ITL_BYPASS

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
TRUE
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
FALSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

SELECTED
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
OPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD

CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

GUID-0644C4E5-EBFA-477B-90B0-7D22E168972A V1 EN

Figure 28:

Circuit breaker 1 control logic

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected


for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL

B1
B2

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

GUID-31AF7051-A62F-4596-B317-36090DEE3235 V1 EN

Figure 29:

Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1


OR6

TRPPTRC1_TRIP
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CB_OPEN_COMMAND

GUID-444B84F9-F5D9-4BA4-9EDC-344CD77F0ED7 V1 EN

Figure 30:

46

Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

AND
B1
B2

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

AND6
DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

NOT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP

IN

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

IN

OUT

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

NOT
OUT

GUID-48415567-5620-4D8C-BEDE-545846CBAB67 V1 EN

Figure 31:

Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

GUID-546ECBD3-B766-45AF-9FF5-948DCA545C6F V1 EN

Figure 32:

External closing command for circuit breaker 1


AND

CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

GUID-361E5BC0-42E9-49D8-ABCE-8677BFA017A1 V1 EN

Figure 33:

3.3.3.5

External opening command for circuit breaker 1

Functional diagrams for measurement functions


The phase current inputs to the IEDare measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current.

RED615
Application Manual

47

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available by using the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The load profile function LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet.
LDPMSTA1 offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding
feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-8B4CEF31-8A1D-40B8-9FCB-E9D2905CA6D5 V1 EN

Figure 34:

Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement


CSMSQI1

GUID-60EF9EC2-4E85-4236-A57D-4D663A2B340A V1 EN

Figure 35:

Current measurement: Sequence current measurement


FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD

GUID-7680B583-F7CC-4C51-B4F4-07071AA72925 V1 EN

Figure 36:

Other measurement: Data monitoring


LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM

MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-D1F501B2-6430-4E72-A889-3B5838D45918 V1 EN

Figure 37:

48

Other measurement: Load profile record

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

3.3.3.6

Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs


X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110_BI3_SG_CHANGE

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-5FB90F71-13E8-4A40-8F9E-EB5131350578 V1 EN

Figure 38:

Binary inputs - X110 terminal block


X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-02B39637-DED0-4D63-A9FE-A4FB30994B9E V1 EN

Figure 39:

Binary inputs - X120 terminal block


UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
GUID-65B379D4-FE8D-45EC-8ACF-933E37B249F5 V1 EN

Figure 40:

RED615
Application Manual

Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

49

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-1D17D025-275D-47B2-90D0-F95635D6CEFD V1 EN

Figure 41:

50

Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED1
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OK
ALARM
RESET

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

CCRDIF1_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED2

LED3

LED4

LED5

GUID-DAF8EA20-89B5-48D6-B6E7-5B844BFD7A7B V1 EN

RED615
Application Manual

51

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED6
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

OK
ALARM
RESET

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

OK
ALARM
RESET

TCSSCBR_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

OK
ALARM
RESET

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED7

LED8

LED9

LED10

LED11

GUID-8A7C2989-86B4-40D7-871F-4AFCB28E598D V1 EN

Figure 42:

3.3.3.7

Default LED connection

Functional diagrams for other timer logics


The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication
and backup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the pulse
timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output
from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
OR
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

B1
B2

TPGAPC1
IN1
IN2

OUT1
OUT2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

OR
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSRTPC1_ALARM

B1
B2

GUID-F96BFC4E-C609-4176-901A-5B9EEC2CFAA9 V1 EN

Figure 43:

52

Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

TPGAPC2
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

IN1
IN2

PHxPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC_OPERATE

B1
B2

OUT1
OUT2

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

OR
O

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

GUID-CB98021B-214D-4A49-816D-91CDE2D603C1 V1 EN

Figure 44:

3.3.3.8

Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multi-purpose protection function
MAPGAPC, high impedance fault detection function PHIZ, runtime counter
MDSOPT and few instances of different types of timers and control functions.
These functions are not included in application configuration but they can be added
based on the system requirements.

3.4

Standard configuration B

3.4.1

Applications
The standard configuration for line current differential protection including
directional earth-fault protection and autoreclosing is mainly intended for cable
feeder applications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for line
current differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. The
configuration also includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection
based on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic principles.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

RED615
Application Manual

53

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
Functions

Uo

3.4.2

1MRS756498 K

RED615

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL IED


With in-zone power transformer support
LOCAL HMI

PROTECTION

ALSO AVAILABLE
Conguration
System
HMI
Time
Authorization

Master Trip
Lockout relay
94/86

ESC

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)


- Disturbance and fault recorder
- Event log and recorded data
- IED self-supervision
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
- Web HMI
AND
OR

Clear

R
L

U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A

3I

I2>
46

I2/I1>
46PD

3I>>>
50P/51P
2

3Ith>F
49F

3I>/Io>BF
51BF/51NBF

3I>>
51P-2

3I2f>
68

3Ith>T
49T

ESC

Clear

3I>
51P-1

R
L

CONDITION MONITORING
AND SUPERVISION
CBCM
CBCM

3dI>L
87L

COMMUNICATION
Protocols:
IEC 61850-8-1
Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3

OPTS
OPTM

MCS 3I
MCS 3I

1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0

Io

BST
BST

Io>>
51N-2

PCS
PCS

Uo

Object
Io>>
67N-2

Io>
67N-1

Yo>
21YN

Io>IEF
67NIEF

Io>HA
51NHA

Po>
32N

OR

OR

Uo>
59G

Ctrl

2)

1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

MEASUREMENT
Ind

DC

ES

1)

2)

- I, Io, Uo
- Limit value supervision
- Load prole record
- Symmetrical components

3)

CB

3)

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

Interfaces:
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial:
Serial glass ber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232/485
D-sub 9, IRIG-B

TCS
TCM

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1)


2

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

PHIZ
HIZ

Io
Io

STANDARD
CONFIGURATION

Check availability of binary inputs/outputs


from technical documentation
Control and indication function for
primary object
Status indication function for
primary object

18
MAP
MAP

Analog interface types

1)

Current transformer

Voltage transformer

1)

Conventional transformer inputs

OI
79

REMARKS
Optional
function

Calculated
value

3 No. of
instances
Io/Uo

3I

OR Alternative
function to be
dened when
ordering

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-6AB801FF-A43F-40D6-8D70-D27EF2F402B0 V1 EN

Figure 45:

3.4.2.1

Functionality overview for standard configuration B

Default I/O connections


Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.

54

RED615
Application Manual

1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1 0
0
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
1 0
0

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Table 16:
Binary input

Description

X110-BI1

Lockout reset

X110-BI2

Binary signal transfer input

X110-BI3

Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm

X110-BI4

Circuit breaker spring charged indication

X110-BI5

Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication

X110-BI6

Circuit breaker truck out (service position) indication

X110-BI7

Earthing switch closed indication

X110-BI8

Earthing switch open indication

X120-BI1

Blocking input for general use

X120-BI2

Circuit breaker close

X120-BI3

Circuit breaker open

Table 17:
Binary input

Default connections for binary outputs


Description

X100-PO1

Close circuit breaker

X100-PO2

Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker

X100-SO1

Line differential protection trip alarm

X100-SO2

Protection communication failure or differential protection not available

X100-PO3

Open circuit breaker/trip 1

X100-PO4

Open circuit breaker/trip 2

X110- SO1

Upstream overcurrent blocking

X110- SO2

Backup protection operated

X110- SO3

Binary transfer signal

Table 18:
LED

RED615
Application Manual

Default connections for binary inputs

Default connections for LEDs


Description

Line differential protection biased stage operate

Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate

Line differential protection is not available

Protection communication failure

Autoreclose in progress

Backup protection operated

Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate

Disturbance recorder triggered

Current transformer failure or trip circuit or circuit breaker supervision

10

Binary signal transfer receive

11

Binary signal transfer send

55

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
3.4.2.2

1MRS756498 K

Default disturbance recorder settings


Table 19:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder analog channels


Description

IL1

IL2

IL3

Io

Uo

10

11

12

Table 20:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder binary channels


ID text

Level trigger mode

LNPLDF1 - start

Positive or Rising

LNPLDF1 - operate

Positive or Rising

PHIPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

PHHPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

PHHPTOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

PHLPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

T1PTTR1 - start

Positive or Rising

T2PTTR1 - start

Positive or Rising

PDNSPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

10

NSPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

11

NSPTOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

12

EFHPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

13

DEFLPDEF1 - start

Positive or Rising

WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM1 - start
14

DEFLPDEF2 - start

Positive or Rising

WPWDE2 - start
EFPADM2 - start
Table continues on next page

56

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Channel
15

ID text
DEFLPDEF3 - start

Level trigger mode


Positive or Rising

WPWDE3 - start
EFPADM3 - start
16

ROVPTOV1 - start

Positive or Rising

17

ROVPTOV2 - start

Positive or Rising

18

ROVPTOV3 - start

Positive or Rising

19

INTRPTEF1 - start

Positive or Rising

20

CCBRBRF1 - trret

Level trigger off

21

CCBRBRF1 - trbu

Level trigger off

22

LNPLDF1 - rstd2h

Level trigger off

23

LNPLDF1 - prot not active

Level trigger off

24

PHIPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
25

NSPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate
26

DEFLPDEF1 - operate

Level trigger off

WPWDE1 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
DEFLPDEF3 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
27

ROVPTOV1 - operate

Level trigger off

ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
28

PDNSPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

29

T1PTTR1 - operate

Level trigger off

T2PTTR2 - operate
30

T1PTTR1 - alarm

Level trigger off

31

T2PTTR2 - alarm

Level trigger off

32

INRPHAR1 - blk2h

Level trigger off

33

PCSRTPC1 - alarm

Level trigger off

34

CCRDIF1 - alarm

Level trigger off

35

X110BI4 - CB spring charged

Level trigger off

36

X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm

Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

RED615
Application Manual

57

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
Channel

1MRS756498 K

ID text

Level trigger mode

37

X120BI3 - CB opened

Level trigger off

38

X120BI2 - CB closed

Level trigger off

39

X120BI1 - ext OC blocking

Level trigger off

40

DARREC1 - unsuc recl

Level trigger off

DARREC1 - close CB
41

3.4.3

DARREC1 - inpro

Level trigger off

Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and functionto-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The residual voltage to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs or an
open delta connected VT.
The IED offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in the IED or via binary input.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be
initiated in the configuration. The Application Configuration tool also includes
fixed Boolean signals TRUE and FALSE which can be used as per the application
need.

3.4.3.1

Functional diagrams for protection


The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
The line current differential function LNPLDF1 is intended to be the main
protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution lines or
cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer failure is
detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied by
predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,
the input is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit
breaker and earth-switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state.

58

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

The intention of this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous
high stage by multiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.
Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to a
failure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and shortcircuit protection. The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be
blocked by energizing the binary input X120: BI1. The instantaneous and first high
stage are blocked by activation of line differential protection.
LNPLDF1

OR
CCRDIF1_FAIL
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL

B1
B2

BLOCK
BLOCK_LS
ENA_MULT_HS

OPERATE
START
STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC
OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC
BLKD2H_REM
PRO_ACTIVE

OR
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

Grouped signals
OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

IN

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

NOT
OUT

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
O

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_RSTD2H

OR

GUID-AD84AF5C-400B-41C3-91D6-949E65CAA3AF V1 EN

Figure 46:

RED615
Application Manual

Line differential protection functions

59

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

B1
B2

PHIPTOC1
O

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_START

OPERATE
START

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_START

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

PHHPTOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

PHHPTOC2
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

PHLPTOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHxPTOC_OPERATE

GUID-548C92CC-518C-48A8-B87B-EED122805E8C V1 EN

Figure 47:

Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking both from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high
stage overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1.
This output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent
protection stage of the IED at the upstream bay.
OR6
PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

GUID-4B78CBAB-A4CD-4E1D-A881-CB07EB4B9E98 V1 EN

Figure 48:

Upstream blocking logic

Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM or wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE or
harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. In addition, there is a dedicated
protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-fault protection or for
cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.

60

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL

OPERATE
START

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_START

OPERATE
START

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_START

OPERATE
START

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_START

DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL

DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFxPDEF_OPERATE

GUID-7CE4340B-32CA-4C2A-BD23-B658F983AC26 V1 EN

Figure 49:

Directional earth-fault protection function


INTRPTEF1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START
BLK_EF

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_START

GUID-0F6D8EB0-A3F2-4998-8606-5B437F3B1FF6 V1 EN

Figure 50:

RED615
Application Manual

Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection function

61

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

WPWDE1
BLOCK
RCA_CTL

OPERATE
START

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_START

OPERATE
START

WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_START

OPERATE
START

WPWDE3_OPERATE
WPWDE3_START

WPWDE2
BLOCK
RCA_CTL

WPWDE3
BLOCK
RCA_CTL

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE

WPWDE_OPERATE

GUID-3C742FD7-5543-44A2-8067-FE696CEA8382 V1 EN

Figure 51:

Wattmetric protection function


EFPADM1
BLOCK
RELEASE

OPERATE
START

EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM1_START

OPERATE
START

EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_START

OPERATE
START

EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFPADM3_START

EFPADM2
BLOCK
RELEASE

EFPADM3
BLOCK
RELEASE

OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

EFPADM_OPERATE

GUID-7BF18144-47E9-4893-9483-3FAEF7305665 V1 EN

Figure 52:

62

Admittance based earth-fault protection function

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block EFHPTOC protects


against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensated networks.
EFHPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_START

GUID-1940E3D0-47D5-43EE-83A8-D168E00149B9 V1 EN

Figure 53:

Cross-country earth-fault protection

The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H offers the possibility to
either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the available
overcurrent function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK

BLK2H

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-692057DE-53FB-46D9-89A7-F1EFF039261B V1 EN

Figure 54:

Inrush detector function

Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance. The negative sequence overcurrent protections are
blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.
NSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_START

NSPTOC2

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2

NSPTOC_OPERATE

GUID-10D0C21D-0607-411C-82D7-8F610AD9A94D V1 EN

Figure 55:

Negative sequence overcurrent protection function

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the


normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. The
function is blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.
PDNSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-2B586B9A-9BB7-40F7-81CD-5F3DF685AA47 V1 EN

Figure 56:
RED615
Application Manual

Phase discontinuity protection


63

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one time
constant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detecting
overloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function
is used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR
ENA_MULT
TEMP_AMB

OPERATE
START
ALARM
BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_START
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

OPERATE
START
ALARM
BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1
BLOCK
TEMP_AMB

GUID-FF27FA66-67F0-4C88-9082-B40763180076 V1 EN

Figure 57:

Thermal overcurrent protection function

The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection by


detecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a
nonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.
ROVPTOV1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_START

OPERATE
START

ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_START

OPERATE
START

ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_START

ROVPTOV2
BLOCK

ROVPTOV3
BLOCK

OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

ROVPTOV_OPERATE

GUID-C3B58F13-0F77-423E-9130-33D80079CD37 V1 EN

Figure 58:

Residual voltage protection function

It should be noted that overcurrent protection, negative sequence overcurrent


protection, phase discontinuity, earth-fault protection and residual overvoltage
protections are all used as backup protection against line differential protection.

64

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

The backup protection operated information is available at binary output


X110:SO2 which can be used for external alarm purpose.
The optional autorecloser function is configured to be initiated by operate signals
from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. It is possible
to create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
The autorecloser function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. By
default, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. A
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INIT_1
INIT_2
INIT_3
INIT_4
INIT_5
INIT_6
DEL_INIT_2
DEL_INIT_3
DEL_INIT_4
BLK_RECL_T
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
CB_POS
CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
RECL_ON
SYNC

OPEN_CB
CLOSE_CB
CMD_WAIT
INPRO
LOCKED
PROT_CRD
UNSUC_RECL
AR_ON
READY
ACTIVE

DARREC1_OPEN_CB
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DARREC1_INPRO
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

OR6
O

GUID-1002F280-77C3-4183-9D8C-C1A9491EA948 V1 EN

Figure 59:

Autorecloser function

The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.

RED615
Application Manual

65

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CCBRBRF1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
START
POSCLOSE
CB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_AL
TRBU
TRRET

CCBRBRF1_TRBU
CCBRBRF1_TRRET

OR6
O

OR6
O

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-FEC1A53B-56F4-47AB-93E0-9E6E8BD69CEF V1 EN

Figure 60:

Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics: TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X110:BI1
can be assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset
with a push button.

66

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TRPPTRC1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-314936ED-1932-452F-AD19-785984517B0B V1 EN

Figure 61:

Trip logic TRPPTRC1


OR6

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TRPPTRC2

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

T2PTTR1_OPERATE
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-30C131EA-7088-46A1-B58F-8F138563EA94 V1 EN

Figure 62:

RED615
Application Manual

Trip logic TRPPTRC2

67

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
3.4.3.2

1MRS756498 K

Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder


The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START
WPWDE1_START
EFPADM1_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFLPDEF2_START
WPWDE2_START
EFPADM2_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

RDRE1
LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2_START
PHLPTOC1_START
T1PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_START
PDNSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
EFHPTOC1_START

OR6
O

ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3_START
INTRPTEF1_START
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
LNPLDF_RSTD2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_START
WPWDE3_START
EFPADM3_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

B1
B2

T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
PCSRTPC1_ALARM
CCRDIF1_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6

DARREC1_INPRO

OR6
O

OR6

OR6
O

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

B1
B2

OR

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

TRIGGERED

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

OR
O

GUID-268B3D85-D897-488A-9B7F-8494B63DCF50 V1 EN

Figure 63:

3.4.3.3

Disturbance recorder

Functional diagrams for condition monitoring


CCRDIF1 detects failure in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is
detected, it can be used to block current protection functions that measure
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.
CCRDIF1
BLOCK

FAIL
ALARM

CCRDIF1_FAIL
CCRDIF1_ALARM

GUID-5078A248-6EC5-4061-AE60-1AD139C07EFC V1 EN

Figure 64:

Current circuit supervision function

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.

68

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Set parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1
BLOCK
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
OPEN_CB_EXE
CLOSE_CB_EXE
PRES_ALM_IN
PRES_LO_IN
SPR_CHR_ST
SPR_CHR
RST_IPOW
RST_CB_WEAR
RST_TRV_T
RST_SPR_T

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

TRV_T_OP_ALM
TRV_T_CL_ALM
SPR_CHR_ALM
OPR_ALM
OPR_LO
IPOW_ALM
IPOW_LO
CB_LIFE_ALM
MON_ALM
PRES_ALM
PRES_LO
OPENPOS
INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO

GUID-C245CA67-6353-4AC0-B004-FF962F2DE242 V1 EN

Figure 65:

Circuit breaker condition monitoring function


OR6

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR
B1
B2

SSCBR1_ALARMS

OR6
O

GUID-5B9CD6B2-864D-446E-AF08-FB69DB807E65 V1 EN

Figure 66:

Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm


NOT

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

IN

OUT

CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-55A52E9F-8B13-49D9-8882-756A5476E72E V1 EN

Figure 67:

Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breaker
tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

Set parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

RED615
Application Manual

69

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM

B1
B2

TCSSCBR_ALARM

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-DECD965E-2872-41A6-B046-BAC70B2833C7 V1 EN

Figure 68:

Trip circuit supervision function


OR6

TRPPTRC1_TRIP
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-DC549599-4B1C-494B-BB34-F56026644379 V1 EN

Figure 69:

Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

The protection communication supervision function PCSRTPC1 is used in the


configuration to block the operation of the line differential function. This way, the
malfunction of the line differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal
transfer outputs during protection communication failure also blocked. These are
done internally without connections in the configurations. The protection
communication supervision alarm is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance
recorder and binary output X100:SO2.
PCSRTPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM
COMM

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

GUID-BAE83A0F-1C32-43F4-B77B-B7EE8CDBFCE8 V1 EN

Figure 70:

Protection communication supervision function

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binary
information which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking
and alarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signal
transfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information
are connected to the BSTGGIO1 input 6 and 7. These are interlocking information
from control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is
connected to the input 8.

70

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving


of same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote
circuit breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the
binary signal transfer function outputs. Also the remote binary transfer output
signal is connected to the binary output X110:SO3.
BSTGGIO1
X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CCRDIF1_FAIL

SEND_SIG_1
SEND_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5
SEND_SIG_6
SEND_SIG_7
SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1
RECV_SIG_2
RECV_SIG_3
RECV_SIG_4
RECV_SIG_5
RECV_SIG_6
RECV_SIG_7
RECV_SIG_8
SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-4AEBA6EE-A7A7-420D-81C4-332109FA18D2 V1 EN

Figure 71:

3.4.3.4

Binary signal transfer function

Functional diagrams for control and interlocking


Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
the standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing
switch status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

GUID-F19F7A81-7B9B-412C-BC89-B389307012A5 V1 EN

Figure 72:

Disconnector 1 control logic


ESSXSWI1

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

GUID-0496B254-C7CF-420D-86DD-E625012BF389 V1 EN

Figure 73:

Earth-switch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of
the trip logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector
and earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the
remote end.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether the disconnector or circuit
breaker truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This
output, together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates

RED615
Application Manual

71

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

the close-enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open
operation for the circuit breaker is always enabled.
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for
example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the breaker closing in the local IED.

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected


for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
TRUE
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
FALSE
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
ENA_OPEN
ENA_CLOSE
BLK_OPEN
BLK_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
ITL_BYPASS

SELECTED
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
OPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD

CBXCBR1_SELECTED
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

GUID-96E28E0A-0306-450B-8B90-2923AC1F47B5 V1 EN

Figure 74:

Circuit breaker 1 control logic


OR

CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

B1
B2

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

GUID-8A675478-7A5A-496D-A943-0EA4BACA6900 V1 EN

Figure 75:

Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

GUID-AE6AFF59-FED2-40E5-BDD0-48ED49F694FF V1 EN

Figure 76:

72

Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

AND
B1
B2

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

AND6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

NOT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP

IN

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

IN

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

IN

OUT

NOT
OUT

NOT
OUT

GUID-70637FEC-196D-40FB-950B-EA9698FD2121 V1 EN

Figure 77:

Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuit


breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature
of the function.

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-84F804B6-C264-4302-9A95-2E3F49094559 V1 EN

Figure 78:

Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

GUID-8D2F88B3-A27B-4E69-A02E-D52176525437 V1 EN

Figure 79:

RED615
Application Manual

External closing command for circuit breaker 1

73

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

GUID-5C8FB700-8CA1-49AB-A7B4-D6FA09B5EDF2 V1 EN

Figure 80:

3.4.3.5

External opening command for circuit breaker 1

Functional diagrams for measurement functions


The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The residual voltage input is connected to the X120 card in the back panel and is
measured by the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The load profile function LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet.
LDPMSTA1 offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding
feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-9F56B67F-3575-4B74-8AA5-3E21C345A348 V1 EN

Figure 81:

Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement


CSMSQI1

GUID-5D25FB19-03A1-4219-9646-46D3EB75497F V1 EN

Figure 82:

Current measurement: Sequence current measurement


RESCMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-D7D2CA02-D35D-4A2E-B58A-4DBC24284EF3 V1 EN

Figure 83:

74

Current measurement: Residual current measurement

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

RESVMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-302309FA-D627-4EB9-A5AF-3C5C3DACBB6F V1 EN

Figure 84:

Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurement


FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD

GUID-3E9B8AE8-FAF5-47CA-BB9F-F8156E3C78C6 V1 EN

Figure 85:

Other measurement: Data monitoring


LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM

MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-D112C16E-7F50-4D49-960A-D38864F4724D V1 EN

Figure 86:

3.4.3.6

Other measurement: Load profile record

Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs


X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-C41ADC88-88C5-4472-A2A2-8786CCF6F829 V1 EN

Figure 87:

RED615
Application Manual

Binary inputs - X110 terminal block

75

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
GUID-676FEBEB-5405-478E-AE6A-2B67ECA8ABBB V1 EN

Figure 88:

Binary inputs - X120 terminal block


UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
GUID-B36EC7FB-6FD6-43C4-8EE4-D4FA8D6F6874 V1 EN

Figure 89:

Binary outputs - X110 terminal block


CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-47B2D69C-8123-4C8F-B991-23B7CF6203FE V1 EN

Figure 90:

76

Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED1
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OK
ALARM
RESET

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

DARREC1_INPRO

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED2

LED3

LED4

LED5

GUID-C6F6FBBA-3D33-45E5-9ECA-D7B16B8A44CE V1 EN

RED615
Application Manual

77

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED6

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED7
CCBRBRF1_TRBU

OK
ALARM
RESET

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED8

LED9

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

SSCBR1_ALARMS
CCRDIF1_ALARM
TCSSCBR_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED10
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

OK
ALARM
RESET

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED11

GUID-7B65F94B-1348-4472-9495-AD53803043D3 V1 EN

Figure 91:

3.4.3.7

Default LED connection

Functional diagrams for other timer logics


The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication
and backup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the pulse
timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output
from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
OR
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

B1
B2

TPGAPC1
IN1
IN2

OUT1
OUT2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

OR
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSRTPC1_ALARM

B1
B2

GUID-7ECCC7B0-4347-46C0-B3D1-AF4C7B1F8430 V1 EN

Figure 92:

78

Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

TPGAPC2
IN1
IN2

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

OUT1
OUT2

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHxPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFPDAM_OPERATE

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE_OPERATE
ROVPTOV_OPERATE
GUID-65003347-878B-49F5-A451-4EE2F7061C1A V1 EN

Figure 93:

3.4.3.8

Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multi-purpose protection function
MAPGAPC, harmonic based earth-fault protection, high impedance fault detection
function PHIZ, runtime counter MDSOPT and few instances of different types of
timers and control functions. These functions are not included in application
configuration but they can be added based on the system requirements.

3.5

Standard configuration C

3.5.1

Applications
The standard configuration for line current differential protection including nondirectional earth-fault protection and autoreclosing is mainly intended for cable
feeder applications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for line
current differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

RED615
Application Manual

79

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
3.5.2

1MRS756498 K

Functions

RED615

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL IED


With in-zone power transformer support
LOCAL HMI

PROTECTION

ALSO AVAILABLE
Conguration
System
HMI
Time
Authorization

Master Trip
Lockout relay
94/86

ESC

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)


- Disturbance and fault recorder
- Event log and recorded data
- IED self-supervision
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
- Web HMI
AND
OR

Clear

R
L

U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A

3I

I2>
46

I2/I1>
46PD

3I>>>
50P/51P
2

3Ith>F
49F

3I>/Io>BF
51BF/51NBF

3I>>
51P-2

3I2f>
68

3Ith>T
49T

ESC

Clear

3I>
51P-1

R
L

CONDITION MONITORING
AND SUPERVISION

3dI>L
87L

CBCM
CBCM

COMMUNICATION
Protocols:
IEC 61850-8-1
Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3

OPTS
OPTM

MCS 3I
MCS 3I

1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0

Io

BST
BST

Io
Io

Io>>>
50N/51N

Io>
51N-1

Io>>
51N-2

PHIZ
HIZ

Io>HA
51NHA

18
MAP
MAP

PCS
PCS

Object

Ctrl

2)

1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

MEASUREMENT
Ind

DC

ES

3)

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

- I, Io
- Limit value supervision
- Load prole record
- Symmetrical components

3)

CB

2)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Interfaces:
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial:
Serial glass ber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232/485
D-sub 9, IRIG-B

TCS
TCM

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1)

1)

STANDARD
CONFIGURATION

Check availability of binary inputs/outputs


from technical documentation
Control and indication function for
primary object
Status indication function for
primary object

Analog interface types

1)

Current transformer

Voltage transformer

1)

Conventional transformer inputs

OI
79

REMARKS
Optional
function

Calculated
value

3 No. of
instances
Io/Uo

3I

OR Alternative
function to be
dened when
ordering

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-C4999021-E1FE-4D55-AB91-FC7C6963501B V1 EN

Figure 94:

3.5.2.1

Functionality overview for standard configuration C

Default I/O connections


Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.

80

RED615
Application Manual

1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1 0
0
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
1 0
0

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Table 21:
Binary input

Description

X110-BI1

External start of breaker failure protection

X110-BI2

Binary signal transfer input

X110-BI3

Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm

X110-BI4

Circuit breaker spring charged indication

X110-BI5

Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication

X110-BI6

Circuit breaker truck out (service position) indication

X110-BI7

Earthing switch closed indication

X110-BI8

Earthing switch open indication

X120-BI1

Blocking input for general use

X120-BI2

Circuit breaker close

X120-BI3

Circuit breaker open

X120-BI4

Lockout reset

Table 22:
Binary input

Default connections for binary outputs


Description

X100-PO1

Close circuit breaker

X100-PO2

Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker

X100-SO1

Line differential protection trip alarm

X100-SO2

Protection communication failure or differential protection not available

X100-PO3

Open circuit breaker/trip 1

X100-PO4

Open circuit breaker/trip 2

X110- SO1

Upstream overcurrent blocking

X110- SO2

Backup protection operated

X110- SO3

Binary transfer signal

Table 23:
LED

RED615
Application Manual

Default connections for binary inputs

Default connections for LEDs


Description

Line differential protection biased stage operate

Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate

Line differential protection is not available

Protection communication failure

Autoreclose in progress

Backup protection operated

Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate

Disturbance recorder triggered

Current transformer failure or trip circuit or circuit breaker supervision

10

Binary signal transfer receive

11

Binary signal transfer send

81

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
3.5.2.2

1MRS756498 K

Default disturbance recorder settings


Table 24:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder analog channels


Description

IL1

IL2

IL3

Io

10

11

12

Table 25:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder binary channels


ID text

Level trigger mode

LNPLDF1 - start

Positive or Rising

LNPLDF1 - operate

Positive or Rising

PHIPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

PHHPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

PHHPTOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

PHLPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

T1PTTR1 - start

Positive or Rising

T2PTTR1 - start

Positive or Rising

PDNSPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

10

NSPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

11

NSPTOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

12

EFHPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

13

EFIPTOC1- start

Positive or Rising

14

EFLPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

15

EFLPTOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

16

CCBRBRF1 - trret

Level trigger off

17

CCBRBRF1 - trbu

Level trigger off

18

LNPLDF1 - rstd2h

Level trigger off

19

LNPLDF1 - prot not active

Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

82

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Channel
20

ID text
PHIPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger mode


Level trigger off

PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
21

NSPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate
22

T1PTTR1- operate

Level trigger off

T2PTTR2 - operate
23

PDNSPTOC1 operate

Level trigger off

24

EFIPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

EFHPTOC1 - operate
EFLPTOC1 - operate
EFLPTOC2 - operate
25

T1PTTR1 - alarm

Level trigger off

26

T2PTTR2 - alarm

Level trigger off

27

INRPHAR1 - blk2h

Level trigger off

28

PCSRTPC1 - alarm

Level trigger off

29

CCRDIF1 - alarm

Level trigger off

30

X110BI4 - CB spring charged

Level trigger off

31

X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm

Level trigger off

32

X120BI3 - CB opened

Level trigger off

33

X120BI2 - CB closed

Level trigger off

34

X120BI1 - ext OC blocking

Level trigger off

35

DARREC1 - unsuc recl

Level trigger off

DARREC1 - close CB
36

3.5.3

DARREC1 - inpro

Level trigger off

Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and functionto-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.

RED615
Application Manual

83

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

RED615 offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in RED615.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be
initiated in the configuration. The Application Configuration tool also includes
fixed Boolean signals TRUE and FALSE which can be used as per the application
need.

3.5.3.1

Functional diagrams for protection


The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
The line current differential function LNPLDF1 is intended to be the main
protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution lines or
cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer failure is
detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied by
predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration it
is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and
earth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention
of this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by
multiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.
Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to a
failure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and shortcircuit protection. The non-directional instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be
blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1. The instantaneous and first high
stages are blocked by activation of line differential protection.

84

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LNPLDF1

OR
CCRDIF1_FAIL
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL

B1
B2

BLOCK
BLOCK_LS
ENA_MULT_HS

OPERATE
START
STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC
OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC
BLKD2H_REM
PRO_ACTIVE

OR
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

IN

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

NOT
OUT

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
O

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_RSTD2H

OR

GUID-95B0A554-5C39-4F26-A640-F78788B2FA00 V1 EN

Figure 95:

Line differential protection functions


LNPLDF1

OR
CCRDIF1_FAIL
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL

B1
B2

BLOCK
BLOCK_LS
ENA_MULT_HS

OPERATE
START
STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC
OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC
BLKD2H_REM
PRO_ACTIVE

OR
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

IN

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

NOT
OUT

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
O

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_RSTD2H

OR

GUID-95B0A554-5C39-4F26-A640-F78788B2FA00 V1 EN

Figure 96:

Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high stage
overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This
output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection
stage of the IED at the upstream bay.
RED615
Application Manual

85

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR6
PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

GUID-FFE28D0E-8985-4E5C-A14B-CB6DE0B30D72 V1 EN

Figure 97:

Upstream blocking logic

Four stages are provided for non-directional earth-fault protection. According to


the order code, the configuration can also include optional harmonic based earthfault protection HAEFPTOC1. On detection of current circuit failure, all earth-fault
functions are blocked to inhibit unwanted operation, which can occur due to
apparent residual current.
EFIPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
EFIPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
EFLPTOC2_START

EFHPTOC1

EFLPTOC1

EFLPTOC2

OR6
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

EFxPTOC_OPERATE

GUID-0E48EAFB-CE67-46B6-88A8-59B4957D7E5B V1 EN

Figure 98:

Earth-fault protection functions

The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H offers the possibility to
either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the available
overcurrent function blocks.

86

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

INRPHAR1
BLOCK

BLK2H

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-7F2BFC97-5C00-40C0-ABBA-3FC501D58D5D V1 EN

Figure 99:

Inrush detector function

Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance. The negative sequence overcurrent protections are
blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.
NSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_START

NSPTOC2

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2

NSPTOC_OPERATE

GUID-3DF9A5C8-F9D5-44B7-BBF6-23B50666086B V1 EN

Figure 100:

Negative sequence overcurrent protection function

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the


normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. The
function is blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current
transformer.
PDNSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-74381B2D-CA6F-445F-A1CC-6096EC6AA562 V1 EN

Figure 101:

Phase discontinuity protection

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one time
constant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detecting
overloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function
is used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.

RED615
Application Manual

87

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR
ENA_MULT
TEMP_AMB

OPERATE
START
ALARM
BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_START
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

OPERATE
START
ALARM
BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1
BLOCK
TEMP_AMB

GUID-C71ADCD1-5E9F-47CF-AF75-D8CD007C423A V1 EN

Figure 102:

Thermal overcurrent protection function

The negative sequence overcurrent protection, phase discontinuity


and earth-fault protections are all used as backup protection against
line differential protection.
The backup protection operated information is available at binary output
X110:SO2 which can be used for external alarm purpose.
The optional autorecloser function is configured to be initiated by operate signals
from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. It is possible
to create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
The autorecloser function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. By
default, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. A
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas the close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.

88

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

DARREC1
INIT_1
INIT_2
INIT_3
INIT_4
INIT_5
INIT_6
DEL_INIT_2
DEL_INIT_3
DEL_INIT_4
BLK_RECL_T
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
CB_POS
CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
RECL_ON
SYNC

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

OPEN_CB
CLOSE_CB
CMD_WAIT
INPRO
LOCKED
PROT_CRD
UNSUC_RECL
AR_ON
READY
ACTIVE

DARREC1_OPEN_CB
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DARREC1_INPRO
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

GUID-963EDA28-A80A-4E12-A265-9804FB4429EA V1 EN

Figure 103:

Autorecloser function

The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED as well as externally
by binary input X110:BI1. The breaker failure protection function offers different
operating modes associated with the circuit breaker position and the measured
phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CCBRBRF1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
START
POSCLOSE
CB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_AL
TRBU
TRRET

CCBRBRF1_TRBU
CCBRBRF1_TRRET

OR6
O

X110_BI1_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-3C4BA546-C7F2-4BEE-B081-73C7AD74CE4E V1 EN

Figure 104:

Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics: TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4

RED615
Application Manual

89

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

can be assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset
with a push button.
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TRPPTRC1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

OR6
O

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-97428C4E-DEE5-44DB-8C51-455FB2D9F1E1 V1 EN

Figure 105:

Trip logic TRPPTRC1


OR6

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TRPPTRC2

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

OR6
O

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-ADD6D3E1-D539-4D7A-8096-715DD0B3D7D8 V1 EN

Figure 106:

3.5.3.2

Trip logic TRPPTRC2

Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder


The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.

90

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

RDRE1

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2

OR
O

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

OR
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

B1
B2

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2_START
PHLPTOC1_START
T1PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_START
PDNSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
EFHPTOC1_START
EFIPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC2_START
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
LNPLDF_RSTD2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR6
O

T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
PCSRTPC1_ALARM
CCRDIF1_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
DARREC1_INPRO

OR
O

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

TRIGGERED

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

GUID-C658211A-FDF1-4ECB-AD66-34E603CE8E4A V1 EN

Figure 107:

3.5.3.3

Disturbance recorder

Functional diagrams for condition monitoring


CCRDIF1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is
detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measure
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.
CCRDIF1
BLOCK

FAIL
ALARM

CCRDIF1_FAIL
CCRDIF1_ALARM

GUID-57D1F65C-2438-4C84-926D-8D21A1FAB8E7 V1 EN

Figure 108:

Current circuit supervision function

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.

RED615
Application Manual

91

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Set the parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1
BLOCK
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
OPEN_CB_EXE
CLOSE_CB_EXE
PRES_ALM_IN
PRES_LO_IN
SPR_CHR_ST
SPR_CHR
RST_IPOW
RST_CB_WEAR
RST_TRV_T
RST_SPR_T

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

TRV_T_OP_ALM
TRV_T_CL_ALM
SPR_CHR_ALM
OPR_ALM
OPR_LO
IPOW_ALM
IPOW_LO
CB_LIFE_ALM
MON_ALM
PRES_ALM
PRES_LO
OPENPOS
INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO

GUID-E16440E7-97F8-4BA5-A65A-8832F72F6333 V1 EN

Figure 109:

Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm


OR6

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR
B1
B2

SSCBR1_ALARMS

OR6
O

GUID-CA85737C-AE1C-4BB1-B7AC-97A97EB90DAD V1 EN

Figure 110:

Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm


NOT

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

IN

OUT

CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-9B1B6395-2EAC-4927-9D9E-77EE41162FF6 V1 EN

Figure 111:

Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included; TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breaker
tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

92

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM

B1
B2

TCSSCBR_ALARM

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-521ECF9A-25C2-4582-8D40-1EA572E4C847 V1 EN

Figure 112:

Trip circuit supervision function


OR6

TRPPTRC1_TRIP
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-36DBAACC-5D67-414F-89E1-DAB5F6411181 V1 EN

Figure 113:

Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

The protection communication supervision function PCSRTPC1 is used in the


configuration to block the operation of the line differential function. This way, the
malfunction of the line differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal
transfer outputs during protection communication failure is also blocked. These are
done internally without connections in the configurations. The protection
communication supervision alarm is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance
recorder and binary output X100:SO2.
PCSRTPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM
COMM

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

GUID-807946BF-54A3-4205-8409-DC71A4518C36 V1 EN

Figure 114:

Protection communication supervision function

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binary
information which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking
and alarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signal
transfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information
are connected to the BSTGGIO input 6 and 7. These are interlocking information
from control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is
connected to the input 8.

RED615
Application Manual

93

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving


of same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote
circuit breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the
binary signal transfer function outputs. The remote binary transfer output signal is
connected to the binary output X110:SO3.
BSTGGIO1
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CCRDIF1_FAIL

SEND_SIG_1
SEND_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5
SEND_SIG_6
SEND_SIG_7
SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1
RECV_SIG_2
RECV_SIG_3
RECV_SIG_4
RECV_SIG_5
RECV_SIG_6
RECV_SIG_7
RECV_SIG_8
SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-7ACC6207-5896-4449-9E89-BAFA92A73010 V1 EN

Figure 115:

3.5.3.4

Binary signal transfer function

Functional diagrams for control and interlocking


Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switch
status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

GUID-F151A155-141D-4581-9218-30796B22E7F0 V1 EN

Figure 116:

Disconnector 1 control logic


ESSXSWI1

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

GUID-8FF4B653-B8F2-4A83-AEB0-D0A371F8E7F1 V1 EN

Figure 117:

Earthswitch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of
the trip logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector
and earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the
remote end.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together
with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable

94

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit
breaker is always enabled.
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for
example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the breaker closing in the local IED.

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected


for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
TRUE
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
FALSE
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
ENA_OPEN
ENA_CLOSE
BLK_OPEN
BLK_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
ITL_BYPASS

SELECTED
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
OPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD

CBXCBR1_SELECTED
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

GUID-B9EB21FF-B3F1-4604-875E-D679BF21A5D0 V1 EN

Figure 118:

Circuit breaker 1 control logic


OR

CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

B1
B2

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

GUID-033E6103-FCE5-460E-AB2C-127523940A3E V1 EN

Figure 119:

Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1


OR6

TRPPTRC1_TRIP
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
DARREC1_OPEN_CB

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CB_OPEN_COMMAND

GUID-304247AE-6DEC-494B-AEDD-C884E5C42731 V1 EN

Figure 120:

RED615
Application Manual

Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

95

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

AND
B1
B2

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

AND6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

NOT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP

IN

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

IN

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

IN

OUT

NOT
OUT

NOT
OUT

GUID-BB477666-A6B7-43C1-AE6B-D20528F6EDFC V1 EN

Figure 121:

Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuit


breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature
of the function.

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-8DFAE731-FCD9-4B2B-B0AF-04D1E35FCD1E V1 EN

Figure 122:

Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if it is applicable for the application.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

GUID-1BAF2BFA-27D8-4E23-81F9-3D0B8F916E56 V1 EN

Figure 123:

96

External closing command for circuit breaker 1

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

GUID-B2A3DFEB-8777-40F7-AA7B-39FD2EEF3F09 V1 EN

Figure 124:

3.5.3.5

External opening command for circuit breaker 1

Functional diagrams for measurement functions


The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The load profile function LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet.
LDPMSTA1 offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding
feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-B3B20052-DF2B-4C6F-AFFC-DF6EBE403620 V1 EN

Figure 125:

Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement


CSMSQI1

GUID-5541207C-33F0-4C30-BC61-FA4B4828ED6E V1 EN

Figure 126:

Current measurement: Sequence current measurement


RESCMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-8C5CCD15-3A6D-494F-B1CF-A96EC9C7D8C5 V1 EN

Figure 127:

RED615
Application Manual

Current measurement: Residual current measurement

97

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-557D77EF-39F9-4E45-B681-4214A621ABBF V1 EN

Figure 128:

Other measurement: Data monitoring


LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM

MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-86C0CEA1-CD8A-4D98-83DE-D9F56D43A917 V1 EN

Figure 129:

3.5.3.6

Other measurement: Load profile record

Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs


X110_BI1_EXT_CCBRBRF_START

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-7EFCB700-0C8D-48F8-8616-61A3E64F6C4B V1 EN

Figure 130:

Binary inputs - X110 terminal block


X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4
GUID-C10DB2F8-2663-4CDC-B032-F425F58578D9 V1 EN

Figure 131:
98

Binary inputs - X120 terminal block


RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
GUID-C643DA33-07A8-41F1-89E9-DD9CB7237283 V1 EN

Figure 132:

Binary outputs - X110 terminal block


CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-0ACF5C83-087E-44ED-AA03-03376F3F090C V1 EN

Figure 133:

RED615
Application Manual

Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

99

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED1
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OK
ALARM
RESET

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

DARREC1_INPRO

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED2

LED3

LED4

LED5

GUID-47DBECE3-D6D9-47CB-ACA7-A7D3B54613EA V1 EN

100

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED6

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED7
CCBRBRF1_TRBU

OK
ALARM
RESET

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED8

LED9

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

SSCBR1_ALARMS
CCRDIF1_ALARM
TCSSCBR_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED10
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

OK
ALARM
RESET

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED11

GUID-81B95D0E-F4E0-4BE7-A2F6-ABFC9D885FF5 V1 EN

Figure 134:

3.5.3.7

Default LED connection

Functional diagrams for other timer logics


The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication
and backup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the pulse
timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output
from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
OR
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

B1
B2

TPGAPC1
IN1
IN2

OUT1
OUT2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

OR
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSRTPC1_ALARM

B1
B2

GUID-FBFAE053-C586-47D2-9D37-918400B7516B V1 EN

Figure 135:

RED615
Application Manual

Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

101

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

TPGAPC2
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

IN1
IN2

EFxPTOC_OPERATE
PHxPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OUT1
OUT2

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

OR6
O

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

GUID-E7E999CE-55E3-443A-95A2-4BF9339375AD V1 EN

Figure 136:

3.5.3.8

Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multi-purpose protection function
MAPGAPC, harmonic based earth-fault protection, high impedance fault detection
function PHIZ, runtime counter MDSOPT and few instances of different types of
timers and control functions. These functions are not included in application
configuration but they can be added based on the system requirements.

3.6

Standard configuration D

3.6.1

Applications
The standard configuration with directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault
protection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection is mainly intended for
cable feeder applications in distribution networks. The standard configuration for
line current differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. The
configuration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection based
on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic principle.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

102

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Functions

UL1UL2UL3

Uo

3.6.2

RED615

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL IED


With in-zone power transformer support
LOCAL HMI

PROTECTION

ALSO AVAILABLE
Conguration
System
HMI
Time
Authorization

Master Trip
Lockout relay
94/86

ESC

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)


- Disturbance and fault recorder
- Event log and recorded data
- IED self-supervision
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
- Web HMI
AND
OR

Clear

R
L

U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A

3I

I2>
46

I2/I1>
46PD

3I>>>
50P/51P
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1 0
0
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
1 0

3Ith>T
49T

3I>/Io>BF
51BF/51NBF

3I>
67-1

3Ith>F
49F

3I2f>
68

3I>>
67-2

PHIZ
HIZ

Clear

R
L

CONDITION MONITORING
AND SUPERVISION

COMMUNICATION
Protocols:
IEC 61850-8-1
Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3

Io

3dI>L
87L

3I

Io

Io>>
51N-2

ESC

BST
BST

STANDARD
CONFIGURATION

FUSEF
60

CBCM
CBCM

OPTS
OPTM

PCS
PCS

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

Interfaces:
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial:
Serial glass ber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232/485
D-sub 9, IRIG-B

MCS 3I
MCS 3I

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

TCS
TCM

Io
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1)
2

Io

Uo

Io>
67N-1

Yo>
21YN

Io>>
67N-2

Io>IEF
67NIEF

Po>
32N

Io>HA
51NHA

OR

Object

UL1UL2UL3

2xRTD
1xmA

3U<
27

3U>
59

FLOC
21FL

3I

U2>
47O-

DC

ES

2)

Uo>
59G

U1<
47U+
4

- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f


- Limit value supervision
- Load prole record
- RTD/mA measurement (optional)
- Symmetrical components

Check availability of binary inputs/outputs


from technical documentation
Control and indication function for
primary object
Status indication function for
primary object

Analog interface types

1)

Current transformer

Voltage transformer 2)

1)
2)

Conventional transformer inputs


One of the ve inputs is reserved for
future applications

PQM3I
PQM3I

OI
79

UL1UL2UL3

f>/f<,
df/dt
81

Ind

3)

MEASUREMENT
3)

CB

1)

OR

Ctrl

2)

PQM3U
PQM3V

PQMU
PQMV

REMARKS

18
MAP
MAP

Optional
function

Calculated
value

3 No. of
instances
Io/Uo

OR Alternative
function to be
dened when
ordering

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-F76822E6-DDB6-44F2-8704-5A5B3035BAFD V1 EN

Figure 137:

3.6.2.1

Functionality overview for standard configuration D

Default I/O connections


Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.

RED615
Application Manual

103

1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1 0
0
0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0
0

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Table 26:
BIO card

1MRS756498 K

Default connections for binary inputs


Description

X110-BI1

Lockout reset

X110-BI2

Binary transfer signal input

X110-BI3

Circuit breaker gas pressure alarm signal

X110-BI4

Circuit breaker spring charged indication

X110-BI5

Circuit breaker truck in service

X110-BI6

Circuit breaker truck in test

X110-BI7

Earthing switch in closed position

X110-BI8

Earthing switch in opened position

X120-BI1

External blocking signal for overcurrent instantaneous stage

X120-BI2

Circuit breaker in closed position

X120-BI3

Circuit breaker opened position

X120-BI4

Table 27:
Binary input

Default connections for binary outputs


Description

X100-PO1

Close circuit close command

X100-PO2

Circuit breaker failed signal - Backup trip to upstream breaker

X100-SO1

Line differential protection operated

X100-SO2

Protection communication failure or differential protection not available

X100-PO3

Circuit breaker open command

X100-PO4

Master trip 2 activated

X110- SO1

Blocking signal for upstream overcurrent protection

X110- SO2

Backup protection operated

X110- SO3

Binary transfer signal

X110- SO4

Table 28:
LED

Default connections for LEDs


Description

Line differential protection biased stage operated

Line differential protection instantaneous stage operated

Line differential protection not active

Protection communication supervision alarm

Autoreclose operation in progress

Backup protection operated

Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate

Disturbance recorder triggered

Table continues on next page

104

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED

3.6.2.2

Description

Supervision alarm

10

Binary transfer signal received

11

Binary transfer signal send

Default disturbance recorder settings


Table 29:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder analog channels


Description

IL1

IL2

IL3

Io

Uo

U1

U2

U3

10

11

12

Table 30:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder binary channels


ID text

Level trigger mode

LNPLDF1 - start

Positive or Rising

LNPLDF1 - operate

Positive or Rising

PHIPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

DPHHPDOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

DPHLPDOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

DPHLPDOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

NSPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

NSPTOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

INTRPTEF1 - start

Positive or Rising

10

EFHPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

11

DEFLPDEF1 - start

Positive or Rising

WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM1 - start
12

DEFLPDEF2 - start

Positive or Rising

WPWDE2 - start
EFPADM2 - start
Table continues on next page
RED615
Application Manual

105

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
Channel
13

1MRS756498 K

ID text
DEFHPDEF1 - start

Level trigger mode


Positive or Rising

WPWDE3 - start
EFPADM3 - start
14

PDNSPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

15

T1PTTR1 - start

Positive or Rising

16

T2PTTR1 - start

Positive or Rising

17

PHPTOV1 - start

Positive or Rising

18

PHPTOV2 - start

Positive or Rising

19

PHPTOV3 - start

Positive or Rising

20

ROVPTOV1 - start

Positive or Rising

21

ROVPTOV2 - start

Positive or Rising

22

ROVPTOV3 - start

Positive or Rising

23

PSPTUV1 - start

Positive or Rising

24

NSPTOV1 - start

Positive or Rising

25

PHPTUV1 - start

Positive or Rising

26

PHPTUV2 - start

Positive or Rising

27

PHPTUV3 - start

Positive or Rising

28

FRPFRQ1 - start

Positive or Rising

29

FRPFRQ2 - start

Positive or Rising

30

FRPFRQ3 - start

Positive or Rising

31

FRPFRQ4 - start

Positive or Rising

32

CCBRBRF1 - trret

Level trigger off

33

CCBRBRF1 - trbu

Level trigger off

34

LNPLDF1 - rstd2h

Level trigger off

35

LNPLDF1 prot not active

Level trigger off

36

PHIPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

DPHHPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
37

NSPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate
38

INTRPTEF1 - operate

Level trigger off

39

EFHPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

106

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Channel
40

ID text
DEFLPDEF1 - operate

Level trigger mode


Level trigger off

WPWDE1 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
DEFLPDEF3 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
41

PDNSPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

42

T1PTTR1 - alarm

Level trigger off

43

T2PTTR2 - alarm

Level trigger off

44

PHPTOV1 - operate

Level trigger off

PHPTOV2 - operate
PHPTOV3 - operate
45

ROVPTOV1 - operate

Level trigger off

ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV1 - operate
46

T1PTTR1 - operate

Level trigger off

T2PTTR2 - operate
47

PHPTUV1 - operate

Level trigger off

PHPTUV2 - operate
PHPTUV3 - operate
48

FRPFRQ1 - operate

Level trigger off

FRPFRQ2 - operate
FRPFRQ3 - operate
FRPFRQ4 - operate
49

INRPHAR1 - blk2h

Level trigger off

50

PCSRTPC1 - alarm

Level trigger off

51

CCRDIF1 - alarm

Level trigger off

52

SEQRFUF1 - fusef 3ph

Level trigger off

53

SEQRFUF1 - fusef u

Level trigger off

54

X110BI4 - CB spring charged

Level trigger off

55

X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm

Level trigger off

56

X120BI3 - CB opened

Level trigger off

57

X120BI2 - CB closed

Level trigger off

58

X120BI1 - ext OC blocking

Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

RED615
Application Manual

107

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
Channel
59

1MRS756498 K

ID text
DARREC1 - unsuc recl

Level trigger mode


Level trigger off

DARREC1 - close CB
60

3.6.3

DARREC1 - inpro

Level trigger off

Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and functionto-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from a current transformer. The residual
current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external core
balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from a voltage transformer. The residual
voltage to the IED is fed from either residually connected VTs, an open delta
connected VT or internally calculated.
RED615 offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in RED615.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be
initiated in the configuration. The Application Configuration tool also includes
fixed Boolean signals TRUE and FALSE which can be used as per the application
need.

3.6.3.1

Functional diagrams for protection


The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
The line current differential function LNPLDF1 is intended to be the main
protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution lines or
cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer failure is
detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied by
predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,
it is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and
earth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention
of this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by
multiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

108

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to a
failure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.
LNPLDF1

OR
CCRDIF1_FAIL
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL

B1
B2

BLOCK
BLOCK_LS
ENA_MULT_HS

OPERATE
START
STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC
OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC
BLKD2H_REM
PRO_ACTIVE

OR
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

Grouped signals
OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

IN

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

NOT
OUT

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
O

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_RSTD2H

OR

GUID-611D4EF5-AABC-487D-A52C-DF018335EC23 V1 EN

Figure 138:

Line differential protection functions

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
Three of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. The non-directional
instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input
X120:BI1.

RED615
Application Manual

109

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

PHIPTOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

OPERATE
START

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_START

OPERATE
START

DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_START

OPERATE
START

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_START

DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
NON_DIR

DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
NON_DIR

DPHLPDOC2
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
NON_DIR

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

DPHxPDOC_OPERATE

GUID-54378804-2337-4274-83AD-186C666871E0 V1 EN

Figure 139:

Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high stage
overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. This
output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protection
stage of the IED at the upstream bay.
OR6
PHIPTOC1_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

GUID-A8F61C44-1CA7-4B82-8271-52E1469CDF37 V1 EN

Figure 140:

Upstream blocking logic

Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM, wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE or
harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. In addition, there is a dedicated
protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-fault protection or for
cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.

110

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL

OPERATE
START

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_START

OPERATE
START

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_START

OPERATE
START

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_START

DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL

DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFxPDEF_OPERATE

GUID-CCDDEA70-4B90-414E-B10B-E65F9710D122 V1 EN

Figure 141:

Directional earth-fault protection function


INTRPTEF1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START
BLK_EF

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_START

GUID-C531508C-CB98-42F7-AF49-0D056C0D0E92 V1 EN

Figure 142:

RED615
Application Manual

Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection function

111

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

WPWDE1
BLOCK
RCA_CTL

OPERATE
START

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_START

OPERATE
START

WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_START

OPERATE
START

WPWDE3_OPERATE
WPWDE3_START

WPWDE2
BLOCK
RCA_CTL

WPWDE3
BLOCK
RCA_CTL

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE

WPWDE_OPERATE

GUID-5E88FC8D-A67B-4C50-8EEC-B06EDC7B1FA5 V1 EN

Figure 143:

Wattmetric protection function


EFPADM1
BLOCK
RELEASE

OPERATE
START

EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM1_START

OPERATE
START

EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_START

OPERATE
START

EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFPADM3_START

EFPADM2
BLOCK
RELEASE

EFPADM3
BLOCK
RELEASE

OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

EFPADM_OPERATE

GUID-AD669779-AC0D-4AC9-AB1A-A1448469F4EB V1 EN

Figure 144:

112

Admittance based earth-fault protection function

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block EFHPTOC protects


against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensated networks. This
protection function uses the calculated residual current originating from the phase
currents.
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_START

GUID-169A80DA-A6A3-4BF5-9065-F78EFB23121C V1 EN

Figure 145:

Crosscountry earth-fault protection

The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H offers the possibility to
either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the available
overcurrent function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK

BLK2H

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-6E272ED2-8A8D-47A0-9D96-095912F1894B V1 EN

Figure 146:

Inrush detector function

Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance.
NSPTOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_START

NSPTOC2
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2

NSPTOC_OPERATE

GUID-1114A789-B912-4053-B00A-5DF48069E33F V1 EN

Figure 147:

Negative sequence overcurrent protection function

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the


normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.
PDNSPTOC1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-109761C8-E52A-43F5-B3D2-95C402F79515 V1 EN

Figure 148:

RED615
Application Manual

Phase discontinuity protection

113

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one time
constant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detecting
overloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function
is used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR
ENA_MULT
TEMP_AMB

OPERATE
START
ALARM
BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_START
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

OPERATE
START
ALARM
BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1
BLOCK
TEMP_AMB

GUID-98DD8187-875F-4B44-977C-3B4097DE9D25 V1 EN

Figure 149:

Thermal overcurrent protection function

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHxPTOV and PHxPTUV


offer protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. Positive sequence
undervoltage PSPTUV and negative sequence overvoltage NSPTOV protection
functions enable voltage-based unbalance protection. A failure in the voltage
measuring circuit is detected by the fuse failure function and the activation is
connected to block undervoltage protection functions and voltage based unbalance
protection functions to avoid faulty tripping.
PHPTOV1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_START

OPERATE
START

PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_START

OPERATE
START

PHPTOV3_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_START

PHPTOV2
BLOCK

PHPTOV3
BLOCK

OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHPTOV_OPERATE

GUID-9C062068-BF92-419D-BF9B-23F1CADE7444 V1 EN

Figure 150:
114

Overvoltage protection function


RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

PHPTUV1
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U

BLOCK

SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U

BLOCK

SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U

BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_START

OPERATE
START

PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_START

OPERATE
START

PHPTUV3_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_START

PHPTUV2

PHPTUV3

OR6
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHPTUV_OPERATE

GUID-57AFB769-5CB0-41B2-9360-F705B44B2B2B V1 EN

Figure 151:

Undervoltage protection function

The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection by


detecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a
nonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.

RED615
Application Manual

115

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

ROVPTOV1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_START

OPERATE
START

ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_START

OPERATE
START

ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_START

ROVPTOV2
BLOCK

ROVPTOV3
BLOCK

OR6
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

ROVPTOV_OPERATE

GUID-FBEA2623-82A1-4F1E-8AD8-FA4E958D3F18 V1 EN

Figure 152:

Residual voltage protection function


NSPTOV1

SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U

BLOCK

OPERATE
START

NSPTOV1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_START

GUID-E1E4377A-82F7-4C71-BDC8-C5D680E824D8 V1 EN

Figure 153:

Negative sequence overvoltage protection function


PSPTUV1

SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U

BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PSPTUV1_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_START

GUID-247948E4-57BB-4945-B6E9-85E149DED994 V1 EN

Figure 154:

Positive sequence undervoltage protection function

The selectable underfrequency or overfrequency protection FRPFRQ prevents


damage to network components under unwanted frequency conditions. The
function also contains a selectable rate of change of the frequency (gradient)
protection to detect an increase or decrease in the fast power system frequency at
an early stage. This can be used as an early indication of a disturbance in the system.

116

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

FRPFRQ1
BLOCK

FRPFRQ2
OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG

FRPFRQ1_OPERATE

OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG

FRPFRQ3_OPERATE

BLOCK

FRPFRQ1_START

FRPFRQ3
BLOCK

OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG

FRPFRQ2_OPERATE

OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG

FRPFRQ4_OPERATE

FRPFRQ2_START

FRPFRQ4
BLOCK

FRPFRQ3_START

FRPFRQ4_START

OR6
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
FRPFRQ4_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

FREQUENCY_OPEATE

GUID-C9432F27-D6B4-4737-9F35-681947A67606 V1 EN

Figure 155:

Frequency protection function

The overcurrent protection, negative sequence overcurrent


protection, phase discontinuity, earth-fault protection, residual
overvoltage protections, phase over and under voltage protection
are all used as backup protection against line differential protection.
The backup protection operated information is available at binary output
X110:SO2 which can be used for external alarm purpose.
The optional autorecloser function is configured to be initiated by operate signals
from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...6 inputs. It is possible
to create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
The autorecloser function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. By
default, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. A
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.

RED615
Application Manual

117

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

DARREC1

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

INIT_1
INIT_2
INIT_3
INIT_4
INIT_5
INIT_6
DEL_INIT_2
DEL_INIT_3
DEL_INIT_4
BLK_RECL_T
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
CB_POS
CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
RECL_ON
SYNC

OPEN_CB
CLOSE_CB
CMD_WAIT
INPRO
LOCKED
PROT_CRD
UNSUC_RECL
AR_ON
READY
ACTIVE

DARREC1_OPEN_CB
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DARREC1_INPRO
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

OR6
O

GUID-94B242D2-EE8E-4E0B-B0D4-774317C8FC70 V1 EN

Figure 156:

Autorecloser function

The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to
the binary output X100:PO2.
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CCBRBRF1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
START
POSCLOSE
CB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_AL
TRBU
TRRET

CCBRBRF1_TRBU
CCBRBRF1_TRRET

OR6
O

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
GUID-527012AF-B080-4E51-BF8C-5888C2C4C4EA V1 EN

Figure 157:

Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip
logics: TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are
provided with a lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal
duration setting. If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X110:BI1
can be assigned to RST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset
with a push button.

118

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
FRPFRQ4_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TRPPTRC1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
GUID-2C4612B0-8C10-4CF1-BD5F-39E0DCD01F9D V1 EN

Figure 158:

RED615
Application Manual

Trip logic TRPPTRC1

119

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

NSPTOV1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
FRPFRQ4_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

1MRS756498 K

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TRPPTRC2

OR
O

B1
B2

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

GUID-F3A60700-5E46-4F06-8D96-765FBCF5729E V1 EN

Figure 159:

3.6.3.2

Trip logic TRPPTRC2

Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder


The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.

120

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

RDRE1
LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START
DPHHPDOC1_START
DPHLPDOC1_START
DPHLPDOC2_START
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
INTRPTEF1_START
EFHPTOC1_START

OR6
OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFLPDEF1_START
EFPADM1_START
WPWDE1_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFLPDEF2_START
EFPADM2_START
WPWDE2_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_START
EFPADM3_START
WPWDE3_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6
OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6

OR6
O

PDNSPTOC1_START
T1PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_START
PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3_START
ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3_START
PSPTUV1_START
NSPTOV1_START
PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3_START
FRPFRQ1_START
FRPFRQ2_START
FRPFRQ3_START
FRPFRQ4_START
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
LNPLDF_RSTD2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR

OR6
O

B1
B2

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_OPERATE

OR6

INRPHAR1_BLK2H
PCSRTPC1_ALARM
CCRDIF1_FAIL
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

OR6

OR
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

B1
B2

PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
FRPFRQ4_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DARREC1_INPRO

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

TRIGGERED

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

OR6

OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

B1
B2

Main Application: Disturbance_Recorder, Page: 1

GUID-66D3883A-0972-4CF4-B376-3C2B42AFA141 V1 EN

Figure 160:

3.6.3.3

Disturbance recorder

Functional diagrams for condition monitoring


CCRDIF1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is
detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measures the
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.
CCRDIF1
BLOCK

FAIL
ALARM

CCRDIF1_FAIL
CCRDIF1_ALARM

GUID-6D7C2FDE-A876-4ABA-B67D-C796339C0F96 V1 EN

Figure 161:

Current circuit supervision function

The fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 detects failures in the voltage


measurement circuits at bus side. Failures, such as an open MCB, raise an alarm.
SEQRFUF1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

BLOCK
CB_CLOSED
DISCON_OPEN
MINCB_OPEN

FUSEF_3PH
FUSEF_U

SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U

GUID-4A101AD2-2735-4154-9872-04E4AF5611C6 V1 EN

Figure 162:

RED615
Application Manual

Fuse failure supervision function

121

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
Set parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1
BLOCK
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
OPEN_CB_EXE
CLOSE_CB_EXE
PRES_ALM_IN
PRES_LO_IN
SPR_CHR_ST
SPR_CHR
RST_IPOW
RST_CB_WEAR
RST_TRV_T
RST_SPR_T

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

TRV_T_OP_ALM
TRV_T_CL_ALM
SPR_CHR_ALM
OPR_ALM
OPR_LO
IPOW_ALM
IPOW_LO
CB_LIFE_ALM
MON_ALM
PRES_ALM
PRES_LO
OPENPOS
INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO

GUID-5357065F-5B56-4478-831F-5F761EF68D8E V1 EN

Figure 163:

Circuit breaker condition monitoring function


OR6

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR
B1
B2

SSCBR1_ALARMS

OR6
O

GUID-851424FB-003E-4B56-83F2-9D6DEB4FA8D8 V1 EN

Figure 164:

Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm


NOT

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

IN

OUT

CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-85AE4A88-0F81-4692-AB72-F76886830EDF V1 EN

Figure 165:

Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by the Master Trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker
open signal.
It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breaker
tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

122

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM

B1
B2

TCSSCBR_ALARM

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-62930E10-32E5-4921-90A5-054F5549A863 V1 EN

Figure 166:

Trip circuit supervision function


OR6

TRPPTRC1_TRIP
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

GUID-9DE42D33-5655-4E55-A2F2-0637375ED830 V1 EN

Figure 167:

Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

The protection communication supervision function PCSRTPC is used in the


configuration to block the operation of the line differential function. This way, the
malfunction of the line differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal
transfer outputs during the protection communication failure also blocked. These
are done internally without connections in the configurations. The protection
communication supervision alarm is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance
recorder and binary output X100:SO2.
PCSRTPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM
COMM

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

GUID-58C48BE3-531B-44BE-A181-0E5F2CFDC098 V1 EN

Figure 168:

Protection communication supervision function

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO is used for changing any binary
information which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking
and alarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signal
transfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information

RED615
Application Manual

123

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

are connected to the BSTGGIO input 6 and 7. This is interlocking information


from control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is
connected to input 8.
As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving
of same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote
circuit breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the
binary signal transfer function outputs. The remote binary transfer output signal is
connected to the binary output X110:SO3.
BSTGGIO1
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CCRDIF1_FAIL

SEND_SIG_1
SEND_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5
SEND_SIG_6
SEND_SIG_7
SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1
RECV_SIG_2
RECV_SIG_3
RECV_SIG_4
RECV_SIG_5
RECV_SIG_6
RECV_SIG_7
RECV_SIG_8
SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-87A8E8D2-1554-4778-BF8C-B810F92C8F9E V1 EN

Figure 169:

3.6.3.4

Binary signal transfer function

Functional diagrams for control and interlocking


Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
the standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing
switch status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

GUID-E64DC447-49CC-4B85-9F45-22476C09D978 V1 EN

Figure 170:

Disconnector 1 control logic


ESSXSWI1

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

GUID-28CD15D7-2D66-449B-9268-129D9739D602 V1 EN

Figure 171:

Earth-switch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of
the trip logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector
and earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the
remote end.

124

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together
with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable
signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit
breaker is always enabled.
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for
example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.

CBXCBR1
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
TRUE
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
FALSE
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
ENA_OPEN
ENA_CLOSE
BLK_OPEN
BLK_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
ITL_BYPASS

SELECTED
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
OPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD

CBXCBR1_SELECTED
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

GUID-6C35F21A-59A7-4EA8-9A6B-6FF1195E2B9D V1 EN

Figure 172:

Circuit breaker 1 control logic

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected


for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

B1
B2

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

GUID-85700A51-C7A3-4CE2-82DD-BE499AED6BBA V1 EN

Figure 173:

Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1


OR6

TRPPTRC1_TRIP
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
DARREC1_OPEN_CB

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CB_OPEN_COMMAND

GUID-BDEE048C-67D8-4979-B135-5CBEAE8EC89E V1 EN

Figure 174:

RED615
Application Manual

Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

125

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

AND
B1
B2

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

AND6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

NOT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP

IN

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

IN

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

IN

OUT

NOT
OUT

NOT
OUT

GUID-7A1BC865-FEEC-483B-902A-FA63B943377F V1 EN

Figure 175:

Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuit


breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature
of the function.

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-50A9F154-A417-4EF5-A3D8-41F165016CF6 V1 EN

Figure 176:

Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

GUID-F4165FE3-89D0-442D-AE06-DE100001A9F8 V1 EN

Figure 177:

126

External closing command for circuit breaker 1

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

GUID-234BEA35-18B0-41CA-9B82-F7F4F098DBA7 V1 EN

Figure 178:

3.6.3.5

External opening command for circuit breaker 1

Functional diagrams for measurement functions


The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by voltage
measurement function VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card
in the back panel. The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures
the residual voltage.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPMSTA1 offers the ability
to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-D90049A9-79DB-4509-8FCF-698EA072ED0C V1 EN

Figure 179:

Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement


CSMSQI1

GUID-B673B40B-4BC5-4B68-A9EA-D7B775EDDE1B V1 EN

Figure 180:

RED615
Application Manual

Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

127

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

RESCMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-5F19BB51-E128-4264-92CE-80919279D13C V1 EN

Figure 181:

Current measurement: Residual current measurement


VMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-185F1398-111B-4110-A7EF-A3DA5C402034 V1 EN

Figure 182:

Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage measurement


VSMSQI1

GUID-DC4A3CBE-B6FD-4010-BA67-57D51816E5A2 V1 EN

Figure 183:

Voltage measurement: Sequence voltage measurement


RESVMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-67A789F2-B77F-42BD-8137-0AC44E5FF554 V1 EN

Figure 184:

Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurement


FMMXU1

GUID-5273D289-0FE3-47D3-B57A-0BA22B5EC842 V1 EN

Figure 185:

Other measurement: Frequency measurement


PEMMXU1
RSTACM

GUID-D2FA74CF-B6E0-46F7-80D8-AEAE9B36A063 V1 EN

Figure 186:

Other measurement: Three-phase power and energy measurement


FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD

GUID-2FC37793-AF71-4854-A84A-70CCEEA56E32 V1 EN

Figure 187:

Other measurement: Data monitoring


LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM

MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-668FDBE4-A071-4F49-9142-2BCA9129622B V1 EN

Figure 188:

128

Other measurement: Load profile record

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

3.6.3.6

Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs


X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-F761D951-A662-402A-B61A-D9E5FBCAA3F4 V1 EN

Figure 189:

Binary inputs - X110 terminal block


X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
GUID-8E0F1D9B-9E5C-405E-B22A-0E5535EDF43D V1 EN

Figure 190:

Binary inputs - X120 terminal block


UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-SO3
GUID-299FE861-9452-4002-A3E6-18ADD61E3FE4 V1 EN

Figure 191:

RED615
Application Manual

Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

129

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
TRPPTRC2_TRIP

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-EE457369-A302-45CC-94F4-C44D0CD0A08C V1 EN

Figure 192:

130

Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED1
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OK
ALARM
RESET

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

DARREC1_INPRO

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED2

LED3

LED4

LED5

GUID-A1199E6D-B317-495E-B6D9-B083279F43D8 V1 EN

RED615
Application Manual

131

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED6

OR6
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED7
CCBRBRF1_TRBU

OK
ALARM
RESET

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED8

LED9

OR6
TCSSCBR_ALARM
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_3PH
SEQRFUF1_FUSEF_U
CCRDIF1_ALARM
SSCBR1_ALARMS

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED10
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

OK
ALARM
RESET

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED11

GUID-76D5018B-613B-4D92-B646-A53D972CDB0F V1 EN

Figure 193:

3.6.3.7

Default LED connection

Functional diagrams for other timer logics


The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication
and backup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to pulse
timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output
from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.

132

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR
B1
B2

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

TPGAPC1
IN1
IN2

OUT1
OUT2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

OR
B1
B2

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSRTPC1_ALARM

GUID-3CDDEC1A-AAFA-46E2-8EC0-02005DEE2C07 V1 EN

Figure 194:

Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active


TPGAPC2
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

IN1
IN2

ROVPTOV_OPERATE
NSPTOC_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OUT1
OUT2

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

OR6

OR6
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFPADM_OPERATE
WPWDE_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

FREQUENCY_OPEATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV_OPERATE
PHPTUV_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

OR6
O

GUID-39193B88-CF7E-4808-8C0C-3F9F3281AA8A V1 EN

Figure 195:

3.6.3.8

Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multi-purpose protection function
MAPGAPC, fault locator, harmonic based earth-fault protection, high impedance
fault detection function PHIZ, runtime counter MDSOPT and different types of
timers and control functions. These functions are not included in application
configuration but they can be added based on the system requirements.

RED615
Application Manual

133

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

3.7

Standard configuration E

3.7.1

Applications

1MRS756498 K

The standard configuration with directional overcurrent and directional earth-fault


protection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection is mainly intended for
cable feeder applications in distribution networks. The standard configuration for
line current differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. The
configuration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection based
on admittance, wattmetric or harmonic principle.
The IED with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory with default
settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing and
internal signal designation within the IED enables this configuration to be further
adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needs by
modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

134

RED615
Application Manual

3.7.2

Functions

RED615

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL IED


With in-zone power transformer support

ALSO AVAILABLE
Conguration
System
HMI
Time
Authorization

Master Trip
Lockout relay
94/86

ESC

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)


- Disturbance and fault recorder
- Event log and recorded data
- IED self-supervision
- Local/Remote push button on LHMI
- User management
- Web HMI
AND
OR

Clear

R
L

U12 0. 0 kV
P 0.00 kW
Q 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A

I2>
46

3I

I2/I1>
46PD

3I>>>
50P/51P
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1 0
0
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
1 0
0

3Ith>F
49F

3Ith>T
49T

3I>/Io>BF
51BF/51NBF

3I>
67-1

3dI>L
87L

Io>
67N-1

Yo>
21YN

Io>HA
51NHA

Po>
32N
OR

Uo

3U<
27

3U>
59

FLOC
21FL

3I

FUSEF
60

CBCM
CBCM

OPTS
OPTM

PCS
PCS

Object

OR

Protocols:
IEC 61850-8-1
Modbus
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3

U2>
47O3

Uo>
59G

f>/f<,
df/dt
81

2)

Ind

DC

ES

2)

3)

1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

MEASUREMENT
- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f
- Limit value supervision
- Load prole record
- Symmetrical components

3)

1)

0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0

TCS
TCM

CB

Check availability of binary inputs/outputs


from technical documentation
Control and indication function for
primary object
Status indication function for
primary object

U1<
47U+
4

Ctrl

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Interfaces:
Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC)
Serial:
Serial glass ber (ST),
RS-485, RS-232/485
D-sub 9, IRIG-B

MCS 3I
MCS 3I

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1)

Io
Io>IEF
67NIEF

COMMUNICATION

Io

BST
BST

Io>>
67N-2

Io>>
51N-2

Io

R
L

3I

UL1UL2UL3

Io

Clear

CONDITION MONITORING
AND SUPERVISION

3I2f>
68

3I>>
67-2

ESC

STANDARD
CONFIGURATION

LOCAL HMI

PROTECTION

UL1UL2UL3

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Analog interface types

1)

Current sensor

Voltage sensor

Current transformer

1)

Combi sensor inputs with conventional


Io input

PQM3I
PQM3I

OI
79

PQM3U
PQM3V

PQMU
PQMV

REMARKS

18
MAP
MAP

Optional
function

Calculated
value

3 No. of
instances
Io/Uo

OR Alternative
function to be
dened when
ordering

RED615
AT REMOTE
END

GUID-D0C7BD80-3FC0-448D-ACD4-D6123319339C V1 EN

Figure 196:

3.7.2.1

Functionality overview for standard configuration E

Default I/O connections


Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physical
connections section.

RED615
Application Manual

135

1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1 0
0
0 1 0 1 0 0
1 0
0

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

Table 31:
BIO card

Default connections for binary inputs


Description

X110-BI1

Circuit breaker plug not inserted

X110-BI2

Circuit breaker spring charged

X110-BI3

Circuit breaker in opened position

X110-BI4

Circuit breaker closed position

X110-BI5

Circuit breaker truck in test

X110-BI6

Circuit breaker truck in service

X110-BI7

Earthing switch in opened position

X110-BI8

Earthing switch in closed position

Table 32:
Binary input

Default connections for binary outputs


Description

X100-PO1

Release for circuit breaker closing

X100-PO2

Circuit breaker closed command

X100-SO1

Release for circuit breaker truck

X100-SO2

Release for earthing switch

X100-PO3

Circuit breaker open command

X100-PO4

Circuit breaker failed signal - Retrip

X110- SO1

X110- SO2

X110- SO3

X110- SO4

Table 33:
LED

136

1MRS756498 K

Default connections for LEDs


Description

Circuit breaker close enabled

Overcurrent protection operated

Earth-fault protection operated

Line differential protection instantaneous stage operated

Line differential protection biased stage operated

Thermal protection

Line differential protection not active

Protection communication supervision alarm

Supervision alarm

10

Circuit breaker monitoring alarm

11

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

3.7.2.2

Default disturbance recorder settings


Table 34:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder analog channels


Description

IL1

IL2

IL3

Io

Uo

U1

U2

U3

10

11

12

Table 35:
Channel

Default disturbance recorder binary channels


ID text

Level trigger mode

LNPLDF1 - start

Positive or Rising

LNPLDF1 - operate

Positive or Rising

PHIPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

DPHHPDOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

DPHLPDOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

DPHLPDOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

NSPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

NSPTOC2 - start

Positive or Rising

INTRPTEF1 - start

Positive or Rising

10

EFHPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

11

DEFLPDEF1 - start

Positive or Rising

WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM1 - start
12

DEFLPDEF2 - start

Positive or Rising

WPWDE2 - start
EFPADM2 - start
13

DEFHPDEF1 - start

Positive or Rising

WPWDE3 - start
EFPADM3 - start
14

PDNSPTOC1 - start

Positive or Rising

15

T1PTTR1 - start

Positive or Rising

Table continues on next page

RED615
Application Manual

137

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations
Channel

1MRS756498 K

ID text

Level trigger mode

16

T2PTTR1 - start

Positive or Rising

17

PHPTOV1 - start

Positive or Rising

18

PHPTOV2 - start

Positive or Rising

19

PHPTOV3 - start

Positive or Rising

20

ROVPTOV1 - start

Positive or Rising

21

ROVPTOV2 - start

Positive or Rising

22

ROVPTOV3 - start

Positive or Rising

23

PSPTUV1 - start

Positive or Rising

24

NSPTOV1 - start

Positive or Rising

25

PHPTUV1 - start

Positive or Rising

26

PHPTUV2 - start

Positive or Rising

27

PHPTUV3 - start

Positive or Rising

28

FRPFRQ1 - start

Positive or Rising

29

FRPFRQ2 - start

Positive or Rising

30

FRPFRQ3 - start

Positive or Rising

31

FRPFRQ4 - start

Positive or Rising

32

CCBRBRF1 - trret

Level trigger off

33

CCBRBRF1 - trbu

Level trigger off

34

LNPLDF1 - rstd2h

Level trigger off

35

LNPLDF1 - prot not active

Level trigger off

36

PHIPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

DPHHPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
37

NSPTOC1 - operater

Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate
38

INTRPTEF1 - operate

Level trigger off

39

EFHPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

40

DEFLPDEF1 - operate

Level trigger off

WPWDE1 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
DEFLPDEF3 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
41

PDNSPTOC1 - operate

Level trigger off

42

T1PTTR1 - alarm

Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

138

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Channel

ID text

Level trigger mode

43

T2PTTR2 - alarm

Level trigger off

44

PHPTOV1 - operate

Level trigger off

PHPTOV2 - operate
PHPTOV3 - operate
45

ROVPTOV1 - operate

Level trigger off

ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV1 - operate
46

T1PTTR1 - operate

Level trigger off

T2PTTR2 - operate
47

PHPTUV1 - operate

Level trigger off

PHPTUV2 - operate
PHPTUV3 - operate
48

FRPFRQ1 - operate

Level trigger off

FRPFRQ2 - operate
FRPFRQ3 - operate
FRPFRQ4 - operate
49

INRPHAR1 - blk2h

Level trigger off

50

PCSRTPC1 - alarm

Level trigger off

51

CCRDIF1 - alarm

Level trigger off

52

X110BI2 - CB spring discharged

Level trigger off

53

X110BI3 - CB opened

Level trigger off

54

X110BI4 - CB closed

Level trigger off

55

DARREC1 - unsuc recl

Level trigger off

DARREC1 - close CB

3.7.3

56

DARREC1 - inpro

Level trigger off

57

General start pulse

Level trigger off

58

General operate pulse

Level trigger off

Sensor settings
This chapter gives short examples on how to define the correct parameters for
sensors. See the technical manual for detailed information about sensor settings.
Sensors have corrections factors, measured and verified by the
sensor manufacturer, to increase the measurement accuracy of
primary values. Correction factors are recommended to be set. Two
types of correction factors are available for voltage and rogowski
sensors. The Amplitude correction factor is named Amplitude corr.
A(B/C) and Angle correction factor is named Angle corr A(B/C).

RED615
Application Manual

139

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

These correction factors can be found on the Sensor's rating plate. If


the correction factors are not available, contact the sensor
manufacturer for more information.

Rogowski sensor setting example


In this example, an 80 A/0.150 V at 50 Hz sensor is used and the application has a
150 A nominal current (In). As the Rogowski sensor is linear and does not saturate,
the 80 A/0.150 V at 50 Hz sensor also works as a 150 A/0.28125 V at 50 Hz
sensor. When defining another primary value for the sensor, also the nominal
voltage has to be redefined to maintain the same transformation ratio. However, the
setting in the IED (Rated Secondary Value) is not in V but in mV/Hz, which makes
the same setting value valid for both 50 and 60 Hz nominal frequency.

RSV =

In
Kr
I pr
fn

GUID-6A480073-5C35-4319-8B38-402608D4C098 V2 EN

RSV

Rated Secondary Value in mV/Hz

In

Application nominal current

Ipr

Sensor-rated primary current

fn

Network nominal frequency

Kr

Sensor-rated voltage at the rated current in mV

In this example, the value is as calculated using the equation.


150 A
150mV
mV
80 A
= 5.625
50Hz
Hz
GUID-13DE42A0-29C0-4FE0-B00B-1215B37E3B7B V2 EN

With this information, the IED Rogowski sensor settings can be set.
Table 36:

Example setting values for rogowski sensor

Setting

Value

Primary current

150 A

Rated secondary value

5.625 mV/Hz

Nominal current

150 A

Unless otherwise specified, the Nominal Current setting should


always be the same as the Primary Current setting.

140

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Voltage sensor setting example


The voltage sensor is based on the resistive divider or capacitive divider principle.
Therefore, the voltage is linear throughout the whole measuring range. The output
signal is a voltage, directly proportional to the primary voltage. For the voltage
sensor all parameters are readable directly from its rating plate and conversions are
not needed.
In this example the system phase-to-phase voltage rating is 10 kV. Thus, the
Primary voltage parameter is set to 10 kV. For IEDs with sensor measurement
support the Voltage input type is always set to CVD sensor and it cannot be
changed. The same applies for the VT connection parameter which is always set to
WYE type. The division ratio for ABB voltage sensors is most often 10000:1.
Thus, the Division ratio parameter is usually set to 10000. The primary voltage is
proportionally divided by this division ratio.
Table 37:

Example setting values for voltage sensor

Setting

3.7.4

Value

Primary voltage

10 kV

VT connection

Wye

Voltage input type

3=CVD sensor

Division ratio

10000

Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and functionto-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed with
PCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside
the IEDs standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels available for
the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbance
recorders parameter settings.
The phase currents to the IED are fed from Rogowski or Combi sensors. The
residual current to the IED is fed from either residually connected CTs, an external
core balance CT, neutral CT or internally calculated.
The phase voltages to the IED are fed from Combi sensors. The residual voltage is
calculated internally.
RED615 offers six different settings group which can be set based on individual
needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting group settings
available in RED615.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to be
initiated in the configuration. The Application Configuration tool also includes

RED615
Application Manual

141

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

fixed Boolean signals TRUE and FALSE which can be used as per the application
need.

3.7.4.1

Functional diagrams for protection


The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail and
according to the factory set default connections.
The line current differential function LNPLDF1 is intended to be the main
protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distribution lines or
cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformer failure is
detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multiplied by
predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,
it is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and
earth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention
of this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by
multiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.
LNPLDF1

OR
CCRDIF1_FAIL
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL

B1
B2

BLOCK
BLOCK_LS
ENA_MULT_HS

OPERATE
START
STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_REM
OPR_HS_LOC
OPR_HS_REM
BLKD2H_LOC
BLKD2H_REM
PRO_ACTIVE

OR
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

OR
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

IN

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_RSTD2H_REM

B1
B2

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

NOT
OUT

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR
O

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_RSTD2H

OR

GUID-87CBED03-0383-4BE8-854E-F7D5F538EA21 V1 EN

Figure 197:

Line differential protection functions

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
Three of them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. The non-directional
instantaneous stage PHIPTOC1 is blocked when line differential is active.

142

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

PHIPTOC1
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
INRPHAR1_BLK2H

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_START

OPERATE
START

DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_START

OPERATE
START

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_START

DPHHPDOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
NON_DIR

DPHLPDOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
NON_DIR

DPHLPDOC2
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
NON_DIR

OR6
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DPHxPDOC_OPERATE

GUID-866A9329-0726-48E5-B316-BE9FAC9C3BFE V1 EN

Figure 198:

Overcurrent protection functions

Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the
IED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on
conventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with
admittance criteria EFPADM, wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE or
harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. In addition, there is a dedicated
protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-fault protection or for
cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.

RED615
Application Manual

143

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

DEFHPDEF1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL

OPERATE
START

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_START

OPERATE
START

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_START

OPERATE
START

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_START

DEFLPDEF1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL

DEFLPDEF2
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFxPDEF_OPERATE

GUID-83E3A3E3-FA76-4A2F-A347-E49A5D2BA786 V1 EN

Figure 199:

Directional earth-fault protection function


INTRPTEF1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START
BLK_EF

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_START

GUID-31918CB0-4497-4D34-8A94-D6E9B9B9E802 V1 EN

Figure 200:

144

Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection function

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

WPWDE1
BLOCK
RCA_CTL

OPERATE
START

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_START

OPERATE
START

WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_START

OPERATE
START

WPWDE3_OPERATE
WPWDE3_START

WPWDE2
BLOCK
RCA_CTL

WPWDE3
BLOCK
RCA_CTL

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE

WPWDE_OPERATE

GUID-03F7F19D-876F-4442-B033-BB7B193A944C V1 EN

Figure 201:

Wattmetric earth-fault protection function


EFPADM1
BLOCK
RELEASE

OPERATE
START

EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM1_START

OPERATE
START

EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_START

OPERATE
START

EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFPADM3_START

EFPADM2
BLOCK
RELEASE

EFPADM3
BLOCK
RELEASE

OR6
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

EFPADM_OPERATE

GUID-FDCDC5B3-335E-41CB-97E5-F481B5E0F5AF V1 EN

Figure 202:

RED615
Application Manual

Admittance based earth-fault protection function

145

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

A dedicated non-directional earth-fault protection block EFHPTOC1 protects


against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensated networks. This
protection function uses the calculated residual current originating from the phase
currents.
EFHPTOC1
BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_START

GUID-101DFCBD-67C7-4002-941B-E0F5C338ECD0 V1 EN

Figure 203:

Earth-fault protection function

The inrush detection block's (INRPHAR1) output BLK2H offers the possibility to
either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the available
overcurrent function blocks.
INRPHAR1
BLOCK

BLK2H

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-0EF609AC-09A6-4B16-93C7-FAD1B59CE0EB V1 EN

Figure 204:

Inrush detector function

Two negative sequence overcurrent stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 are provided
for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect the feeder
against phase unbalance. The function is blocked on detection of failure in current
secondary circuit.
NSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK
ENA_MULT

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START

OPERATE
START

NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_START

NSPTOC2

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2

NSPTOC_OPERATE

GUID-2C582C54-8D7E-413A-8A4B-52EA6F7962E1 V1 EN

Figure 205:

Negative sequence overcurrent protection function

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the


normal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.
PDNSPTOC1
CCRDIF1_FAIL

BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-B4D669EF-FBC3-4722-AD3C-E4ED6A5F5407 V1 EN

Figure 206:
146

Phase discontinuity protection function


RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one time
constant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detecting
overloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function
is used to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1
BLK_OPR
ENA_MULT
TEMP_AMB

OPERATE
START
ALARM
BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_START
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

OPERATE
START
ALARM
BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1
BLOCK
TEMP_AMB

GUID-DD8DF01A-3462-4564-8AD2-C8C8ADF991AD V1 EN

Figure 207:

Thermal overcurrent protection function

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHxPTOV and PHxPTUV


offer protection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. Positive sequence
undervoltage PSPTUV and negative sequence overvoltage NSPTOV protection
functions enable voltage-based unbalance protection.
PHPTOV1
BLOCK

PHPTUV1
OPERATE
START

PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_START

BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_START

BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PHPTOV3_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_START

BLOCK

PHPTOV2
BLOCK

PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_START

OPERATE
START

PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_START

OPERATE
START

PHPTUV3_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_START

PHPTUV2

PHPTOV3
BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PHPTUV3

GUID-FD2018DA-06D2-43A2-B1B9-C304150ED9AD V1 EN

Figure 208:

Overvoltage and undervoltage protection function

The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection by


detecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as a
nonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.

RED615
Application Manual

147

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

ROVPTOV1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_START

OPERATE
START

ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_START

OPERATE
START

ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_START

ROVPTOV2
BLOCK

ROVPTOV3
BLOCK

GUID-50003B1E-3AF3-4A9C-8DC4-B24FB1437AE3 V1 EN

Figure 209:

Residual overvoltage protection function


NSPTOV1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START

NSPTOV1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_START

GUID-77086659-9F8C-4D9B-A321-D477719D4E38 V1 EN

Figure 210:

Negative sequence overvoltage protection function


PSPTUV1
BLOCK

OPERATE
START

PSPTUV1_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_START

GUID-D945E695-E908-43EC-85DA-0B0DAD3EEB0D V1 EN

Figure 211:

Positive sequence undervoltage protection function

The selectable underfrequency or overfrequency protection FRPFRQ prevents


damage to network components under unwanted frequency conditions. The
function also contains a selectable rate of change of the frequency (gradient)
protection to detect an increase or decrease in the fast power system frequency at
an early stage. This can be used as an early indication of a disturbance in the system.
FRPFRQ1
BLOCK

FRPFRQ2
OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG

FRPFRQ1_OPERATE

OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG

FRPFRQ3_OPERATE

BLOCK

FRPFRQ1_START

FRPFRQ3
BLOCK

OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG

FRPFRQ2_OPERATE

OPERATE
OPR_OFRQ
OPR_UFRQ
OPR_FRG
START
ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
ST_FRG

FRPFRQ4_OPERATE

FRPFRQ2_START

FRPFRQ4

FRPFRQ3_START

BLOCK

FRPFRQ4_START

GUID-2F019AA9-4626-4DB7-B163-B3D450A71009 V1 EN

Figure 212:

148

Frequency protection function

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

The optional autorecloser function is configured to be initiated by operate signals


from a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...6 inputs. It is possible
to create individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
The autorecloser function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. By
default, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. A
control command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks the
autorecloser function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autorecloser sequence is expressed with the
CB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are
connected to the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open
command from the autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3,
whereas close command is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1
OR6
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

X110_BI3_CB_OPENED
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INIT_1
INIT_2
INIT_3
INIT_4
INIT_5
INIT_6
DEL_INIT_2
DEL_INIT_3
DEL_INIT_4
BLK_RECL_T
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
CB_POS
CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
RECL_ON
SYNC

OPEN_CB
CLOSE_CB
CMD_WAIT
INPRO
LOCKED
PROT_CRD
UNSUC_RECL
AR_ON
READY
ACTIVE

DARREC1_OPEN_CB
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DARREC1_INPRO
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

OR6
O

GUID-CFECED4C-F593-4C8C-AF46-3677D75DF1C4 V1 EN

Figure 213:

Autorecloser function

The breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by a
number of different protection functions available in the IED. The breaker failure
protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuit
breaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET and
TRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker through
TRPPTRC2_TRIP. The same TRRET output is also connected to the binary output
X100:PO4.

RED615
Application Manual

149

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CCBRBRF1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
START
POSCLOSE
CB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_AL
TRBU
TRRET

CCBRBRF1_TRBU
CCBRBRF1_TRRET

OR6
O

X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

GUID-5A56DA6F-3B22-4867-B935-AC209B7A8122 V1 EN

Figure 214:

Circuit breaker failure protection function

General start and operate from all the functions are connected to pulse timer
TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output from
TPGAPC1 can be connected to binary outputs.
OR6
PHIPTOC1_START
DPHLPDOC1_START
DPHLPDOC2_START
DPHHPDOC1_START
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INTRPTEF1_START
EFHPTOC1_START
PDNSPTOC1_START
ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TPGAPC4

OR6

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_START
DEFLPDEF1_START
DEFLPDEF2_START
EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

NSPTOV1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_OPERATE
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
FRPFRQ4_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OUT1
OUT2

GENERAL_START_PULSE
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6
OR6

IN1
IN2

OR6
OR6
NSPTOV1_START
WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3_START
PSPTUV1_START
PHPTOV1_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6
OR6
PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3_START
PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3_START
FRPFRQ1_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6

OR6
FRPFRQ2_START
FRPFRQ3_START
FRPFRQ4_START
T1PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_START
LNPLDF1_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6
O

GUID-C7D2F9C8-CBC9-4588-BBEF-80C90BDF6473 V1 EN

Figure 215:

General start and operate signals

The operate signals from the protections are connected to the two trip logics:
TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output from TRPPTRC1 trip logic functions is
available at binary output X100:PO3. The trip logic functions are provided with a
lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting.
If the lockout operation mode is required, binary input can be assigned to
RST_LKOUT input of the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

150

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
FRPFRQ4_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TRPPTRC1

OR6
O

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

GUID-32B07A1D-B7F6-479D-BF3B-3BB5331A863F V1 EN

Figure 216:

RED615
Application Manual

Trip logic TRPPTRC1

151

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

OR6
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

NSPTOV1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
FRPFRQ4_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

1MRS756498 K

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TRPPTRC2

OR

OR6
O

B1
B2

BLOCK
OPERATE
RST_LKOUT

TRIP
CL_LKOUT

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

OR6
O

LNPLDF1_OPERATE
GUID-748AFA48-FAB3-46D7-A9E6-6631028E297F V1 EN

Figure 217:

3.7.4.2

Trip logic TRPPTRC2

Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder


The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to
trigger the disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the
disturbance recorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the
selected signals from different functions and the few binary inputs are also
connected to the disturbance recorder.
Once the order of signals connected to binary inputs of RDRE is
changed, make the changes to parameter setting tool.

152

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR6
DEFLPDEF1_START
EFPADM1_START
WPWDE1_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFLPDEF2_START
EFPADM2_START
WPWDE2_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DEFHPDEF1_START
EFPADM3_START
WPWDE3_START

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

B1
B2

OR6

OR6
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

PDNSPTOC1_START
T1PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_START
PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2_START
PHPTOV3_START
ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3_START
PSPTUV1_START
NSPTOV1_START
PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2_START
PHPTUV3_START
FRPFRQ1_START
FRPFRQ2_START
FRPFRQ3_START
FRPFRQ4_START
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
LNPLDF_RSTD2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OR

OR6
O

B1
B2

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM

OR6
PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

INRPHAR1_BLK2H
PCSRTPC1_ALARM
CCRDIF1_FAIL
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

OR6
O

DARREC1_INPRO
GENERAL_START_PULSE
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE

OR6
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
FRPFRQ3_OPERATE
FRPFRQ4_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START
DPHHPDOC1_START
DPHLPDOC1_START
DPHLPDOC2_START
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
INTRPTEF1_START
EFHPTOC1_START

OR6

OR
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE

RDRE1

B1
B2

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64

TRIGGERED

OR6
O

OR
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

B1
B2

GUID-2B380C77-3B2C-4788-8BEC-D1A60316C6F8 V1 EN

Figure 218:

3.7.4.3

Disturbance recorder

Functional diagrams for condition monitoring


CCRDIF1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is
detected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measures the
calculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary
operation.
CCRDIF1
BLOCK

FAIL
ALARM

CCRDIF1_FAIL
CCRDIF1_ALARM

GUID-7544D1F4-3408-4871-BDBD-CD69DE9A2F35 V1 EN

Figure 219:

Current circuit supervision function

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switch
status based on the connected binary input information and the measured current
levels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.

RED615
Application Manual

153

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

Set the parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1
BLOCK
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
OPEN_CB_EXE
CLOSE_CB_EXE
PRES_ALM_IN
PRES_LO_IN
SPR_CHR_ST
SPR_CHR
RST_IPOW
RST_CB_WEAR
RST_TRV_T
RST_SPR_T

X110_BI3_CB_OPENED
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
CB_SPRING_CHARGED

TRV_T_OP_ALM
TRV_T_CL_ALM
SPR_CHR_ALM
OPR_ALM
OPR_LO
IPOW_ALM
IPOW_LO
CB_LIFE_ALM
MON_ALM
PRES_ALM
PRES_LO
OPENPOS
INVALIDPOS
CLOSEPOS

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO

GUID-99741CF0-7D88-4AAA-84EF-61E7DC4CBC2A V1 EN

Figure 220:

Circuit breaker condition monitoring function


OR6

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALM
SSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALM
SSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

SSCBR1_IPOW_LO
SSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OR
B1
B2

SSCBR1_ALARMS

OR6
O

GUID-B6B90A88-8924-4B32-8F2A-DEF3931388FA V1 EN

Figure 221:

Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm


NOT

X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

IN

OUT

CB_SPRING_CHARGED

GUID-FA20C086-8CA5-4430-B18F-1FB631480979 V1 EN

Figure 222:

Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for power
output X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions are
blocked by both the Master Trips TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the binary input
X110:BI1 indicating the IED plug out.
It is assumed that there is external resistor in the circuit breaker
tripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breaker
normally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

154

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

TCSSCBR1
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

BLOCK

ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2

OR
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM

B1
B2

TCSSCBR_ALARM

GUID-D5151801-2495-4DF2-A362-F7CB9AE1AFC0 V1 EN

Figure 223:

Trip circuit supervision function


OR6

TRPPTRC1_TRIP
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-7EA01D36-6EB3-41C3-AC1B-CB3536E444C0 V1 EN

Figure 224:

Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

The protection communication supervision function PCSRTPC1 is used in the


configuration to block the operation of the line differential function. This way, the
malfunction of the line differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal
transfer outputs during the protection communication failure is also blocked. These
are done internally without connections in the configurations. The protection
communication supervision alarm is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance
recorder and binary output X100:SO2.
PCSRTPC1
OK
WARNING
ALARM
COMM

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

GUID-D1562A57-E53D-43C7-BC28-A7E27E95C11A V1 EN

Figure 225:

Protection communication supervision function

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO is used for changing any binary
information which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking
and alarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information
are connected to the BSTGGIO input 6 and 7. This is interlocking information
from control logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is
connected to input 8.
As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving
of same information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote
RED615
Application Manual

155

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

circuit breaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the
binary signal transfer function outputs.
BSTGGIO1

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CCRDIF1_FAIL

SEND_SIG_1
SEND_SIG_2
SEND_SIG_3
SEND_SIG_4
SEND_SIG_5
SEND_SIG_6
SEND_SIG_7
SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1
RECV_SIG_2
RECV_SIG_3
RECV_SIG_4
RECV_SIG_5
RECV_SIG_6
RECV_SIG_7
RECV_SIG_8
SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
REMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCRDIF_FAIL

GUID-E5BF4D5D-5C15-408A-B9CC-19F8B9499729 V1 EN

Figure 226:

3.7.4.4

Binary signal transfer

Functional diagrams for control and interlocking


Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.
DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 and
ESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in
the standard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing
switch status information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1 respectively.
The configuration also includes closed enable interlocking logic for disconnector
and earthing switch. These signals are available for binary outputs X100:SO1 and
X100:SO2 respectively.
DCSXSWI1
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

AND6
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DC1_CLOSE_ENABLED

GUID-FCAC88AB-7DA0-4F21-808E-C961DA3BA381 V1 EN

Figure 227:

156

Disconnector 1 interlocking logic

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

ESSXSWI1
X110_BI7_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

OR6
X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED

GUID-9A7AC8F3-6187-4203-8D9D-BC9B9D34FA72 V1 EN

Figure 228:

Earth-switch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated.
The input can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of
the disconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of
the trip logics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector
and earth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the
remote end.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breaker
truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together
with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable
signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit
breaker is always enabled.
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, for
example, in case of protection communication not connected, it
disables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.

Any additional signals required by the application can be connected


for opening and closing of circuit breaker.

CBXCBR1
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
TRUE
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
FALSE
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
ENA_OPEN
ENA_CLOSE
BLK_OPEN
BLK_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
ITL_BYPASS

SELECTED
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
OPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD

CBXCBR1_SELECTED
CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD

GUID-26FE1003-2AA2-42AD-8E92-6E84693FBF66 V1 EN

Figure 229:

RED615
Application Manual

Circuit breaker 1 control logic

157

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR
CBXCBR1_EXE_CL
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

B1
B2

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

GUID-1893502C-2D0A-44DF-A2BE-37057971BE78 V1 EN

Figure 230:

Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1


OR6

CBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRPPTRC1_TRIP
DARREC1_OPEN_CB

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CB_OPEN_COMMAND

GUID-AD01A758-DC66-4017-9F8A-A4321FF0BB4F V1 EN

Figure 231:

Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1


AND6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
CB_SPRING_CHARGED

NOT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP

IN

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

IN

OUT

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

NOT
OUT

AND6
CB_SPRING_CHARGED

NOT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP

IN

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

IN

DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

B1
B2

OUT

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE

NOT
OUT

AND
O

TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-8A8014C7-EF80-45C5-BDCB-81392240A562 V1 EN

Figure 232:

Circuit breaker close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuit


breaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature
of the function.

158

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

OR6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-DAFA0354-CBB5-4A1A-AE95-6C61DF47D264 V1 EN

Figure 233:

Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing and
opening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command
and modify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuit
breaker in local or remote mode, if it is applicable for the application.

AND
CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

GUID-4C5A7939-3DB5-4E2C-8057-BC2831AC51A9 V1 EN

Figure 234:

External closing command for circuit breaker 1


AND

CONTROL_LOCAL
FALSE

B1
B2

OR
B1
B2

AND
CONTROL_REMOTE
FALSE

B1
B2

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

GUID-F8E822D5-467C-4F65-BC4C-8E224B373771 V1 EN

Figure 235:

3.7.4.5

External opening command for circuit breaker 1

Functional diagrams for measurement functions


The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase current
measurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card
in the back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the
sequence current and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures
the residual current.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by voltage
measurement function VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card
in the back panel. The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the
sequence voltage.

RED615
Application Manual

159

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under the
measurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks
can generate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the
measured current values.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase
power measurement PEMMXU1 are available. The load profile function
LDPMSTA1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPMSTA1 offers the ability
to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-21605B4E-39E0-4B01-AAA8-F9837624B897 V1 EN

Figure 236:

Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement


CSMSQI1

GUID-B12A010D-5651-40C2-84E6-DE98FB2446FC V1 EN

Figure 237:

Current measurement: Sequence current measurement


RESCMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN

GUID-D40B9D8C-2274-4C05-A80A-720413B2D9AA V1 EN

Figure 238:

Current measurement: Residual current measurement


VMMXU1
BLOCK

HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
LOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM

GUID-32CBD962-FA4F-4773-8AE8-4CA75080EF3A V1 EN

Figure 239:

Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage measurement


VSMSQI1

GUID-C4C01605-D449-4A1C-8B7F-5445D42529B4 V1 EN

Figure 240:

Voltage measurement: Sequence voltage measurement


FMMXU1

GUID-491E5D77-77E0-4BCD-A9AB-CAB90BB34C3D V1 EN

Figure 241:

160

Other measurement: Frequency measurement

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

PEMMXU1
RSTACM
GUID-DFAF0FB2-4B5B-41D4-B32F-C6524E78E15A V1 EN

Figure 242:

Other measurement: Three-phase power and energy measurement


FLTMSTA1
BLOCK
CB_CLRD

GUID-E66A78DE-D1C4-452F-9AB7-2792070EFB23 V1 EN

Figure 243:

Other measurement: Data monitoring


LDPMSTA1
RSTMEM

MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM

GUID-119EC22D-0241-4FAF-B5D9-9AEC58F98ECC V1 EN

Figure 244:

Other measurement: Load profile record

The power quality function CMHAI1 and VMHAI1 can be used to measure the
harmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation,
that is, sage and swells can be measured by power quality function PHQVVR1. By
default, these power quality functions are not included in the configuration.
Depending on the application, the required logic connections can be made by
PCM600.

3.7.4.6

Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs


X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110_BI7_ES1_OPENED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
GUID-B790F48B-CE29-4B6F-9F1E-8999A1305540 V1 EN

Figure 245:

RED615
Application Manual

Default binary inputs - X110

161

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
DC1_CLOSE_ENABLED

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
CB_OPEN_COMMAND

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
CCBRBRF1_TRRET

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4
GUID-6D07D6AC-B66C-4352-8580-1333FA32EAFD V1 EN

Figure 246:

162

Default binary outputs - X100

RED615
Application Manual

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED1
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE

LED2

OR6
NSPTOC_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OK
ALARM
RESET

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED3

OR6
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
EFPADM_OPERATE
WPWDE_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED4
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED5

GUID-AAE166F5-E7EA-4F5C-AD82-A86D094C9007 V1 EN

RED615
Application Manual

163

Section 3
RED615 standard configurations

1MRS756498 K

LED6

OR
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARM

B1
B2

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED7
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

OK
ALARM
RESET

PCSRTPC1_ALARM

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED8

LED9

OR6
TCSSCBR_ALARM
CCRDIF1_ALARM

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

OK
ALARM
RESET

LED10
SSCBR1_ALARMS

OK
ALARM
RESET

GUID-401B69BF-1917-4EE7-A132-A1322C92B1B0 V1 EN

Figure 247:

3.7.4.7

Default LED connection

Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multi-purpose protection function
MAPGAPC, fault locator, harmonic based earth-fault protection, runtime counter
MDSOPT and few instances of different types of timers and control functions.
These functions are not included in application configuration but they can be added
based on the system requirements.

164

RED615
Application Manual

Section 4
Requirements for measurement transformers

1MRS756498 K

Section 4

Requirements for measurement


transformers

4.1

Current transformers

4.1.1

Current transformer requirements for non-directional


overcurrent protection
For reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to be
chosen carefully. The distortion of the secondary current of a saturated CT may
endanger the operation, selectivity, and co-ordination of protection. However,
when the CT is correctly selected, a fast and reliable short circuit protection can be
enabled.
The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on the
network fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CT
burden. The protection settings of the IED should be defined in accordance with
the CT performance as well as other factors.

4.1.1.1

Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor


The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primary
current to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer
of type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For
protective current transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest
permissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current
prescribed for the accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning
protection).
Table 38:
Accuracy class

Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers


Current error at
rated primary
current (%)

Phase displacement at rated primary


current
minutes
centiradians

Composite error at
rated accuracy limit
primary current (%)

5P

60

1.8

10P

10

The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrent
protection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if
there are accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering,
power metering, and so on) of the IED.

RED615
Application Manual

165

Section 4
Requirements for measurement transformers

1MRS756498 K

The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current
magnitude at which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the
secondary current of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the
performance of the protection IED.
In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy
limit factor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the
actual CT burden.
The actual accuracy limit factor is calculated using the formula:
Fa Fn

Sin + Sn
Sin + S

A071141 V1 EN

4.1.1.2

Fn

the accuracy limit factor with the nominal external burden Sn

Sin

the internal secondary burden of the CT

the actual external burden

Non-directional overcurrent protection


The current transformer selection
Non-directional overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on the
accuracy class or on the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) of the CTs. It is, however,
recommended to select a CT with Fa of at least 20.
The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal
and dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the IED is not exceeded.
This is always fulfilled when
I1n > Ikmax / 100,
Ikmax is the highest fault current.
The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of the
IED. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominal primary current
can be used than given by the formula.

Recommended start current settings


If Ikmin is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is to
operate, the start current should be set using the formula:
Current start value < 0.7 x (Ikmin / I1n)
I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.

166

RED615
Application Manual

1MRS756498 K

Section 4
Requirements for measurement transformers

The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection IED inaccuracy, current
transformer errors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.
The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the
high set stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused by
the CT saturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is
noticeably lower than Fa.
When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT
does not need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simply
according to the formula.

Delay in operation caused by saturation of current transformers


The saturation of CT may cause a delayed IED operation. To ensure the time
selectivity, the delay must be taken into account when setting the operate times of
successive IEDs.
With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that
is as long as the time the constant of the DC component of the fault current, when
the current is only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on the
accuracy limit factor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and
on the operate time setting.
With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as
being as long as the time constant of the DC component.
With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, the
AC component of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times the
starting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged.
Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:
Fa > 20*Current start value / I1n
The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the IED.

4.1.1.3

Example for non-directional overcurrent protection


The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection is
implemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.

RED615
Application Manual

167

Section 4
Requirements for measurement transformers

1MRS756498 K

A071142 V1 EN

Figure 248:

Example of three-stage overcurrent protection

The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase
short circuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is
calculated to be 59.
The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice the
nominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective with
the next IED (not visible in the figure above). The settings for the high-set stage
and instantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the
downstream protection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined so
that the IED operates with the minimum fault current and it does not operate with
the maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in the figure above.
For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (I>>>)
in this example is 3 500 A (5.83 x I2n). For the CT characteristics point of view, the
criteria given by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the
IED setting is considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burden
could have been selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.

168

RED615
Application Manual

Section 5
IED physical connections

1MRS756498 K

Section 5

IED physical connections

5.1

Inputs

5.1.1

Energizing inputs

5.1.1.1

Phase currents
The IED can also be used in single or two-phase applications by
leaving one or two energizing inputs unoccupied. However, at least
terminals X120/7-8 must be connected.
Table 39:

Phase current inputs included in configurations A, B, C and D

Terminal

5.1.1.2

Description

X120-7, 8

IL1

X120-9, 10

IL2

X120-11, 12

IL3

Residual current
Table 40:

Residual current input included in configurations A, B, C and D

Terminal

Description

X120-13, 14

Table 41:

Io

Residual current input included in configuration E

Terminal

Description

X130-1, 2

5.1.1.3

Phase voltages
Table 42:
Terminal

RED615
Application Manual

Io

Phase voltage inputs included in configurations D


Description

X130-11,12

U1

X130-13,14

U2

X130-15,16

U3

169

Section 5
IED physical connections
5.1.1.4

1MRS756498 K

Residual voltage
Table 43:

Additional residual voltage input included in configuration B

Terminal

Description

X120-5, 6

Table 44:

Uo

Additional residual voltage input included in configuration D

Terminal

Description

X130-17, 18

5.1.1.5

Uo

Sensor inputs
Table 45:

Combi sensor inputs included in configuration E

Terminal

5.1.2

Description

X131

IL1
U1

X132

IL2
U2

X133

IL3
U3

Auxiliary supply voltage input


The auxiliary voltage of the IED is connected to terminals X100/1-2. At DC
supply, the positive lead is connected to terminal X100-1. The permitted auxiliary
voltage range (AC/DC or DC) is marked on the top of the LHMI of the IED.
Table 46:

Auxiliary voltage supply

Terminal

5.1.3

Description

X100-1

+ Input

X100-2

- Input

Binary inputs
The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to
unlatch output contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control of
IED settings.

170

RED615
Application Manual

Section 5
IED physical connections

1MRS756498 K

Table 47:

Binary input terminals X110-1...13 with BIO0005 module

Terminal

Description

X110-1

BI1, +

X110-2

BI1, -

X110-3

BI2, +

X110-4

BI2, -

X110-5

BI3, +

X110-6

BI3, -

X110-6

BI4, -

X110-7

BI4, +

X110-8

BI5, +

X110-9

BI5, -

X110-9

BI6, -

X110-10

BI6, +

X110-11

BI7, +

X110-12

BI7, -

X110-12

BI8, -

X110-13

BI8, +

Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configurations A, C and D.


Table 48:

Binary input terminals X120-1...6

Terminal

Description

X120-1

BI1, +

X120-2

BI1, -

X120-3

BI2, +

X120-2

BI2, -

X120-4

BI3, +

X120-2

BI3, -

X120-5

BI4, +

X120-6

BI4, -

Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configuration B.


Table 49:
Terminal

RED615
Application Manual

Binary input terminals X120-1...4


Description

X120-1

BI1, +

X120-2

BI1, -

X120-3

BI2, +

X120-2

BI2, -

X120-4

BI3, +

X120-2

BI3, 171

Section 5
IED physical connections

1MRS756498 K

Binary inputs of slot X130 are optional for configurations A, B and C.


Table 50:

Binary input terminals X130-1...9

Terminal

Description

X130-1

BI1, +

X130-2

BI1, -

X130-2

BI2, -

X130-3

BI2, +

X130-4

BI3, +

X130-5

BI3, -

X130-5

BI4, -

X130-6

BI4, +

X130-7

BI5, +

X130-8

BI5, -

X130-8

BI6, -

X130-9

BI6, +

Optional binary inputs of slot X130 are available with configuration D.


Table 51:

Optional binary input terminals X130-1...8 with AIM0006

Terminal

5.1.4

Description

X130-1

BI1, +

X130-2

BI1, -

X130-3

BI2, +

X130-4

BI2, -

X130-5

BI3, +

X130-6

BI3, -

X130-7

BI4, +

X130-8

BI4, -

RTD/mA inputs
It is possible to connect mA and RTD based measurement sensors to the IED if the
IED is provided with optional with AIM0003 module in standard configuration D.
Table 52:

Optional RTD/mA inputs with AIM0003 module

Terminal

Description

X130-1

mA 1 (AI1), +

X130-2

mA 1 (AI1), -

X130-3

RTD1 (AI2), +

X130-4

RTD1 (AI2), -

X130-5

RTD1 (AI2), ground

Table continues on next page


172

RED615
Application Manual

Section 5
IED physical connections

1MRS756498 K

Terminal

Description

X130-6

RTD2 (AI3), +

X130-7

RTD2 (AI3), -

X130-8

RTD2 (AI3), ground

5.2

Outputs

5.2.1

Outputs for tripping and controlling


Output contacts PO1, PO2, PO3 and PO4 are heavy-duty trip contacts capable of
controlling most circuit breakers. On delivery from the factory, the trip signals
from all the protection stages are routed to PO3 and PO4.
Table 53:

5.2.2

Output contacts

Terminal

Description

X100-6

PO1, NO

X100-7

PO1, NO

X100-8

PO2, NO

X100-9

PO2, NO

X100-15

PO3, NO (TCS resistor)

X100-16

PO3, NO

X100-17

PO3, NO

X100-18

PO3 (TCS1 input), NO

X100-19

PO3 (TCS1 input), NO

X100-20

PO4, NO (TCS resistor)

X100-21

PO4, NO

X100-22

PO4, NO

X100-23

PO4 (TCS2 input), NO

X100-24

PO4 (TCS2 input), NO

Outputs for signalling


SO output contacts can be used for signalling on start and tripping of the IEDOn
delivery from the factory, the start and alarm signals from all the protection stages
are routed to signalling outputs.

RED615
Application Manual

173

Section 5
IED physical connections

Table 54:

1MRS756498 K

Output contacts X100-10...14

Terminal

Description

X100-10

SO1, common

X100-11

SO1, NC

X100-12

SO1, NO

X100-13

SO2, NO

X100-14

SO2, NO

Table 55:

Output contacts X110-14...24 with BIO0005

Terminal

Description

X110-14

SO1, common

X110-15

SO1, NO

X110-16

SO1, NC

X110-17

SO2, common

X110-18

SO2, NO

X110-19

SO2, NC

X110-20

SO3, common

X110-21

SO3, NO

X110-22

SO3, NC

X110-23

SO4, common

X110-24

SO4, NO

Output contacts of slot X130 are available in the optional BIO0006 module with
configurations A, B and C.
Table 56:
Terminal

174

Output contacts X130-10...18


Description

X130-10

SO1, common

X130-11

SO1, NO

X130-12

SO1, NC

X130-13

SO2, common

X130-14

SO2, NO

X130-15

SO2, NC

X130-16

SO3, common

X130-17

SO3, NO

X130-18

SO3, NC

RED615
Application Manual

Section 5
IED physical connections

1MRS756498 K

5.2.3

IRF
The IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system of
the protection IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and
the contact is closed (X100/3-5). When a fault is detected by the self-supervision
system or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the output contact drops off and the
contact closes (X100/3-4).
Table 57:
Terminal

5.3

IRF contact
Description

X100-3

IRF, common

X100-4

Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected

X100-5

Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected

Protection communication options


Two different protection communication options are available for the IED, that is, a
fibre optic link and a galvanic pilot wire link.
Multi-mode or single-mode glass fibre can be used in a fibre optic link. Select the
required glass fibre mode when ordering the IED. Link lengths up to 2 km with multimode fibre and link lengths up to 20 km with single-mode fibre can be achieved.
The fibre optic cable used for protection communication is connected to the X16/
LD connector in the IED. See 615 series technical manual for more information.
If a galvanic pilot wire is used as a protection communication link, the pilot wire
modem RPW600 is required. Select the pilot wire option when ordering the IED.
The protection communication link always requires two modems in a protection
scheme, thus delivered in pairs of master (RPW600M) and follower (RPW600F)
units. The IED is connected to the pilot wire modem using a single-mode fibre
optic cable. Thus a single-mode version of IED is required if the pilot wire link is
used. The fibre optic cable is connected to the X16/LD connector in the IED and in
Ethernet FX connector in the pilot wire modem.
Setting or configuration is not needed with either of the pilot wire modem variants
or with the IED. Pilot wire link lengths up to 8 km with 0.8 mm2 twisted pair
cables can be applied. Even higher distances can be achieved with good quality
twisted pair cables in the pilot wire link. The achieved link length also depends on
the noise levels in the installations.
The pilot wire modem has QoS (quality of service) LEDs in the front panel for
easy diagnostics of the pilot wire link quality. The diagnostics feature does not
depend on the payload over the pilot wire link and can be used for checking the
quality of the intended pilot wire link even without installing the IEDs. In addition,
a diagnostic kit is available as an ordering option for more advanced diagnostic and

RED615
Application Manual

175

Section 5
IED physical connections

1MRS756498 K

logging of diagnostic parameters of the pilot wire link. The kit consists of a CDROM with the RPW600 Diagnostic Tool software with a built-in help, required
drivers and a special serial diagnostic cable to be connected to the console port of
the modem.
Fibre optic link

MM or SM fiber optic

RED615

RED615

Galvanic pilot wire link

SM fibre optic

SM fibre optic

3m

3m

Galvanic pilot wire twisted-pair

RPW600M
pilot wire modem master

RPW600F
pilot wire modem
follower
RED615

RED615
GUID-D4D15565-FD47-425D-8ABE-EA1A3C455673 V1 EN

Figure 249:

Protection communication options

See RPW600 user guide for more information.

176

RED615
Application Manual

Section 6
Glossary

1MRS756498 K

Section 6

RED615
Application Manual

Glossary

AI

Analog input

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange

BI

Binary input

BIO

Binary input and output

BO

Binary output

CB

Circuit breaker

CT

Current transformer

DC

1. Direct current
2. Disconnector
3. Double command

DNP3

A distributed network protocol originally developed by


Westronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownership
of the protocol and assumes responsibility for its
evolution.

DPC

Double-point control

EMC

Electromagnetic compatibility

Ethernet

A standard for connecting a family of frame-based


computer networking technologies into a LAN

FIFO

First in, first out

FTP

File transfer protocol

GOOSE

Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event

HMI

Human-machine interface

I/O

Input/output

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 60870-5-103

1. Communication standard for protective equipment


2. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point
communication

IEC 61850

International standard for substation communication


and modeling

IEC 61850-8-1

A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850


standard series

IED

Intelligent electronic device

177

Section 6
Glossary

178

1MRS756498 K

IP address

A set of four numbers between 0 and 255, separated


by periods. Each server connected to the Internet is
assigned a unique IP address that specifies the
location for the TCP/IP protocol.

IRIG-B

Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code format


B

LAN

Local area network

LCD

Liquid crystal display

LED

Light-emitting diode

LHMI

Local human-machine interface

MAC

Media access control

MCB

Miniature circuit breaker

MMS

1. Manufacturing message specification


2. Metering management system

Modbus

A serial communication protocol developed by the


Modicon company in 1979. Originally used for
communication in PLCs and RTU devices.

Modbus TCP/IP

Modbus RTU protocol which uses TCP/IP and


Ethernet to carry data between devices

PCM600

Protection and Control IED Manager

PO

Power output

RIO600

Remote I/O unit

RJ-45

Galvanic connector type

RS-485

Serial link according to EIA standard RS485

RSTP

Rapid spanning tree protocol

RTD

Resistance temperature detector

RTU

Remote terminal unit

Single-line
diagram

Simplified notation for representing a three-phase


power system. Instead of representing each of three
phases with a separate line or terminal, only one
conductor is represented.

SLD

Single-line diagram

SNTP

Simple Network Time Protocol

SO

Signal output

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TCS

Trip-circuit supervision

VT

Voltage transformer
RED615
Application Manual

Section 6
Glossary

1MRS756498 K

RED615
Application Manual

WAN

Wide area network

WHMI

Web human-machine interface

179

180

181

ABB Oy
Medium Voltage Products,
Distribution Automation
P.O. Box 699
FI-65101 VAASA, Finland
Phone
+358 10 22 11
Fax
+358 10 22 41094

ABB Limited
Distribution Automation
Maneja
Vadodara 390013, India
Phone
+91 265 2604032
Fax
+91 265 2638922
www.abb.com/substationautomation

1MRS756498 K Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved.

Contact us

S-ar putea să vă placă și